Methods for Collagen Imaging

ABSTRACT

Diagnostic compositions and methods for imaging and/or assessing collagen are described. The diagnostic compositions can include collagen binding peptides.

CLAIM OF PRIORITY

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.11/618,458, filed Dec. 29, 2006, which claims priority under 35 USC§119(e) to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/755,709, filed onDec. 29, 2005, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/755,710, filedon Dec. 29, 2005, U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/844,768,filed on Sep. 15, 2006, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No.60/845,118, filed on Sep. 15, 2006, all of which are incorporated byreference in their entirety herein.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This disclosure relates to compositions containing diagnostic agentsthat are capable of binding to and thus imaging collagen, and moreparticularly to the use of such compositions for myocardial imaging andperfusion measurements.

BACKGROUND

Collagens are a class of extracellular matrix proteins that represent30% of total body protein and shape the structure of tendons, bones, andconnective tissues. Abnormal or excessive accumulation of collagen inorgans such as the liver, lungs, kidneys, or breasts, and vasculaturecan lead to fibrosis of such organs (e.g., cirrhosis of the liver),lesions in the vasculature or breasts, collagen-induced arthritis,Dupuytren's disease, rheumatoid arthritis, and other collagen vasculardiseases. It would be useful to have both therapeutic and diagnosticagents that could assist in the treatment or diagnosis of suchdisorders.

Diagnostic imaging techniques, such as magnetic resonance imaging (MRI),X-ray, nuclear radiopharmaceutical imaging, ultraviolet-visible-infraredlight imaging, and ultrasound, have been used in medical diagnosis for anumber of years. Contrast media additionally have been used to improveor increase the resolution of the image or to provide specificdiagnostic information.

Complexes between gadolinium or other paramagnetic ions and organicligands are widely used to enhance and improve MRI contrast. Gadoliniumcomplexes increase contrast by increasing the nuclear magneticrelaxation rates of protons found in the water molecules that areaccessible to the diagnostic compositions during MRI (Caravan, P., etal., Chem. Rev. 99, 2293 (1999)). The relaxation rate of the protons inthese water molecules increases relative to protons in other watermolecules that are not accessible to the diagnostic composition. Thischange in relaxation rate leads to improved contrast of the images. Inaddition, this increase in relaxation rate within a specific populationof water molecule protons can result in an ability to collect more imagedata in a given amount of time. This in turn results in an improvedsignal to noise ratio.

Imaging may also be performed using light, in which case an optical dyeis chosen to provide signal. In particular, light in the 600-1300 nm(visible to near-infrared) range passes relatively easily throughbiological tissues and can be used for imaging purposes. The light thatis transmitted through, or scattered by, reflected, or re-emitted(fluorescence), is detected and an image generated. Changes in theabsorbance, reflectance, or fluorescence characteristics of a dye,including an increase or decrease in the number of absorbance peaks or achange in their wavelength maxima, may occur upon binding to abiological target, thus providing additional tissue contrast. In somesituations, for example the diagnosis of disease close to the bodysurface, UV or visible light may also be used.

Ischemic heart disease is a leading cause of death in the developedworld. Efforts in the detection of the disease often focus on thepatency of major blood vessels such as the coronary arteries, and recentparadigms have emphasized the importance of the coronarymicrovasculature in providing blood flow, including collateral bloodflow, to injured myocardial tissue. Since cardiac catheterizationassessing the patency of coronary arteries is an expensive and riskyprocedure, noninvasive techniques that assess the likelihood of coronaryartery disease have flourished, especially nuclear medicine basedmyocardial perfusion studies.

The most widely used techniques for measuring myocardial perfusion areSPECT (single photon computed tomography) imaging protocols usinginjectable nuclear agents (e.g., “hot” radiotracers), such as thalliumisotope or technetium Sestamibi (MIBI). Frequently the patient isrequired to undergo a stress test (e.g., a treadmill exercise stresstest) to aid in the SPECT evaluation of myocardial perfusion. Thecardiac effect of exercise stress can also be simulatedpharmacologically by the intravenous administration of a coronaryvasodilator. Typically, after injection of the nuclear agent duringstress, the myocardium is imaged. A second redistribution rest image isthen obtained after an appropriate rest period (approximately 3-4hours). Alternatively, the patient may be given a second, 2×concentrated dose of the nuclear agent during the rest phase and asecond rest image is then acquired. The clinician compares the two imagesets to diagnose ischemic areas as “cold” spots on the stress image.SPECT imaging, however, may result in inconclusive perfusion data due toattenuation artifacts and/or from the relatively low spatial resolutioncompared to other modalities. For instance, subendocardial defects maynot be adequately visualized. Moreover, SPECT imaging exposes thepatient to ionizing radiation.

Recently, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) techniques have also beenproposed to assess myocardial perfusion. In general, MRI is appealingbecause of its noninvasive character, ability to provide improvedspatial resolution, and ability to derive other important measures ofcardiac performance, including cardiac morphology, wall motion andejection fraction in a single sitting. Current MRI perfusion imagingtechniques require rapid imaging of the myocardium during the first pass(after bolus injection) of an extracellular fluid (ECF) or intravascularMR diagnostic composition; this technique is referred to as MRFP(magnetic resonance first pass) perfusion imaging. On T1-weightedimages, the ischemic zones appear with a delayed and lower signalenhancement (e.g., hypointensity) as compared with normally perfusedmyocardium. Myocardial signal intensity versus time curves can then beanalyzed to extract perfusion parameters. Intensity differences,however, rapidly decrease as the MR diagnostic composition is diluted inthe systemic circulation after the first pass. Furthermore, because ofthe rapid timing requirement of MRFP perfusion imaging, the patient mustundergo pharmacologically-induced stress while positioned inside the MRIapparatus. Rapid imaging may also limit the resolution of the perfusionmaps obtained and may result in poor quantification of perfusion.

Because ischemically-injured myocardium contains both reversibly andirreversibly injured regions, accurate characterization of myocardialinjury, in particular the differentiation between non-viable, necrotic(necrotic, acutely infarcted myocardium or chronically infarctedmyocardium), ischemic, and viable myocardial tissue, is an importantfactor in proper patient management. This characterization can be aidedby an analysis of the perfusion and/or reperfusion state of myocardialtissue adjacent to coronary microvessels either before or after anischemic event (e.g., an acute myocardial infarction).

SUMMARY

Peptides described herein exhibit an affinity for collagen, and can beused to treat, prevent, ameliorate, or evaluate physiologic functions,manifestations, or disorders where collagens are present in eithernormal or atypically high concentrations. Examples include the use ofcollagen-specific agents to treat, prevent, ameliorate, or evaluatefibrosis in the lungs, liver, kidneys, joints, or breasts, or lesions inthe vasculature, or heart. Use of such agents can also affect theremodeling of myocardial tissue after an ischemic event. Thecompositions thus may be useful for both diagnostic and therapeuticpurposes.

The disclosure is based on peptides and peptide-targeted diagnosticcompositions, including multimeric diagnostic compositions, for MR,optical, SPECT, nuclear medicine, and radionuclide imaging, wherein apeptide can function both as a targeting group and a point of attachmentfor one or more chelates at one or more of the internal amino acids, N-,and/or C-termini, either directly or via an optional intervening linker.Diagnostic compositions maintain binding affinity for biological targetssuch as collagen. Diagnostic compositions have a sufficient half-lifefollowing in vivo administration such that effective imaging studies canbe performed.

The disclosure is also based on the discovery of MR-based methods anddiagnostic compositions for measuring myocardial perfusion that provideenhanced anatomical detail and accurate perfusion maps. The methods anddiagnostic compositions allow maximum flexibility in the induction ofstress in a patient prior to imaging and permit an extended time periodfor MR signal acquisition post-stress induction. Use of the methods anddiagnostic compositions allow the differentiation of ischemia frominfarct. Diagnostic compositions are also useful for imaging themyocardium or physiologic states having high concentrations of collagen.Diagnostic compositions can be useful for characterizing atheroscleroticplaque as fibrotic or not, and/or to assess the presence or absence ofvulnerable plaque.

A diagnostic composition can include the following formula:

[EMTG]_(n)-[L]_(m)-[C]_(p)

wherein m and p are independently one to ten; n is one to five; C is aphysiologically compatible metal chelating group; L is a linker; andEMTG is an Extracellular Matrix Targeting Group.

In other embodiments, a diagnostic composition can include the followingformula:

wherein m and p are independently one to ten; n is one to five; C is aphysiologically compatible metal chelating group; L is a linker; andEMTG is an Extracellular Matrix Targeting Group.

In certain embodiments, C can be complexed to a paramagnetic metal ion.The paramagnetic metal ion can be selected from the group consisting of:Gd(III), Fe(III), Mn(II), Mn(III), Cr(III), Cu(II), Dy(III), Ho(III),Er(III), Pr(III), Eu(II), Eu(III), Tb(III), and Tb(IV), and thephysiologically compatible metal chelating group (C) can include acyclic or an acyclic organic chelating agent. In some cases, the cyclicor acyclic organic chelating agent can be selected from the groupconsisting of DTPA, DOTA, HP-DO3A, NOTA, DOTAGA, Glu-DTPA, DTPA-BMA, andderivatives thereof. In other cases, the cyclic or acyclic organicchelating agent comprises Glu-DTPA, DOTAGA, DOTA, or derivativesthereof, and wherein said paramagnetic metal ion complexed to the metalchelate is Gd(III).

In some embodiments, L can include a linear, branched, or cyclicpeptide. In specific cases, L can include a linear dipeptide having thesequence G-G or P-P. In other cases, L can include a linear, branched,or cyclic alkane, alkene, or alkyne, or a phosphodiester moiety.Additionally, L can be substituted with at least one functional groupselected from the group consisting of ketones, esters, amides, ethers,carbonates, sulfonamides, ureas, and carbamates.

In other embodiments, EMTG can include a cyclic peptide wherein L capsthe N-terminus of the peptide as an amide moiety; or EMTG can include acyclic peptide wherein L caps the C-terminus of said peptide as an amidemoiety.

In certain embodiments, m can be one or two; n can be one to four oralternatively, n can be one to two; p can be one to four or p can be oneto two.

In other embodiments the EMTG includes any of the cyclic amino acidsequences set forth in Tables 1-16, 18-41, 44, and 45. In furtherembodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including the aminoacid sequence W-X1-C-(X2)_(n)-W-X3-C (SEQ ID NO: 806), wherein n is 5-7;X1, X2, and X3 are any amino acid; and wherein the peptide has a lengthof 11 to 30 amino acids. In some embodiments, n can be 5, 6, or 7. Incertain embodiments, X1 is selected from K, Q, Y, T, E, D, L, R, H, I,V, N, M, and A; and X2 is selected from R, E, D, S, H, K, N, Y, M, V, I,Q, and G.

In certain embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence W-X1-C-X2-G*-X3-X4-X5-X6-W-X7-C (SEQ ID NO:807), wherein X1 is selected from any amino acid; X2 is selected from S,V, T, H, R, Y, and D; G* is selected from G and any amino acid in Dform; X3 is selected from D and N, independently in D or L form; X4 isselected from any amino acid in D or L form; X5 is selected from anyamino acid in D or L form; X6 is selected from T, K, H, D, A, R, Y, andE; and X7 is selected from Y, K, H, V, S, M, and N; wherein the peptidehas a total length of 12 to 30 amino acids. In some cases, the cyclicpeptide includes the amino acid sequenceW-X1-C-X2-G*-X3-X4-X5-X6-W-X7-C-X8-X9 (SEQ ID NO: 808), wherein X8 isselected from N, L, I, R, K, and A; and X9 is selected from Y, F, M, R,and H, independently in D or L form. In other cases, X3 is D; X1 is T;X2 is selected from S, T and V; X4 is selected from E, H, I, S, and A;X5 is selected from Y, K, L, F, A, and P; X6 is T; X7 is selected from Hand K; X8 is selected from N, K, and A; and X9 is selected from Y and F.In certain embodiments, the cyclic peptide includes one of the followingamino acid sequences W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C (SEQ ID NO: 809);W-T-C-V-G-D-H-K-T-W-K-C (SEQ ID NO: 810); W-Y-C-S-G-D-H-L-D-W-K-C (SEQID NO: 811); and W-E-C-H-G-N-E-F-E-W-N-C (SEQ ID NO: 812).

The EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including the amino acid sequenceQ-W-H-C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G (SEQ ID NO: 74), wherein the peptide hasa total length of 16 to 30 amino acids.

In other embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence C-Y-Q-X1-X2-C-W-X3-W (SEQ ID NO: 813), whereinX1 is any amino acid; X2 is any amino acid; X3 is any amino acid;wherein each C, Y, Q, W, X1, X2, or X3, independently, can be in the Dform; and wherein the peptide contains 9 to 30 amino acids. In certaincases, X1 is selected from A, G, I, L, V, F, and P; X2 is selected fromG, A, I, L, V, F, and P; and X3 is selected from I, A, G, L, V, F, andP. The cyclic peptide can include the amino acid sequenceC-Y-Q-A-G-C-W-1-W (SEQ ID NO: 814) in any combination of D or L formsfor the individual amino acids; or C-Y-Q-A-G-C-W-1-W (SEQ ID NO: 814) inall L-form.

In certain embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence Y-X1-X2-C-Y-Q-X3-X4-C-W-X5-W (SEQ ID NO: 815),wherein X1 is any amino acid; X2 is any amino acid; X3 is any aminoacid; X4 is any amino acid; X5 is I, G, L, V, F, or P; and wherein thepeptide contains 12 to 30 amino acids. In some embodiments, X1 isselected from H, R, K, E, D, Q, or N; X2 is selected from A, G, I, L, V,F, or P; X3 is selected from A, G, I, L, V, F, or P; X4 is selected fromG, A, I, L, V, F, or P; and X5 is selected from I, L, V, or F.

In some embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including theamino acid sequence C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQ ID NO: 816),wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, and X8 are independently any aminoacid; C* is C or Pen in D or L form; and wherein the peptide has alength of 10 to 30 amino acids. In certain embodiments, X1 is selectedfrom T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F,F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D or L form; X2 isselected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in Dor L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl),I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), in D or L form;X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF₃), 4-Pal, 1-Nal,F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib,or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH),ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6 isselected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or Lform; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal,thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or L form; and X8 is selected from Y, A,R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe),Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form. In othercases, X1 is selected from T or S; X2 is selected from T or G; X3 isselected from R or D; X4 is selected from F or E; X5 is selected from Por Y; X6 is selected from H or T; X7 is selected from H or W; and X8 isselected from Y or H. Alternatively, the cyclic peptide can include oneof the following amino acid sequences: C-T-T-S-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO:817); C-T-T-K-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO: 818); C-Y-T-Y-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ IDNO: 819); C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO: 820); and C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C(SEQ ID NO: 821).

In other embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11 (SEQ IDNO: 822), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 areindependently any amino acid; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form; andwherein the peptide has a length of 13 to 30 amino acids. In some cases,X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal,4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D orL form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn,or Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P,Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), inD or L form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF₃), 4-Pal,1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D,R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in Dor L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, orb-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib,Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or L form; X8 isselected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr,H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D orL form X9 is selected from L, A, I, K, V, F, N, Y, P, Aib, Hse, Hfe,Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, or F(4-NH2), in D or L form; X10 is selectedfrom Y, A, F, E, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Y(3-I), in D orL form; and X11 is selected from G, E, Y, F, V, Bip, F(4-NH2), or Aib,in D or L form. In other cases, X9 is selected from L or N, preferablyL; X10 is Y; and X11 is selected from G or E.

The EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including the amino acid sequenceC*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11-X12 (SEQ ID NO: 823), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are independently anyamino acids; X12 is any one or two amino acids; C* is C or Pen, in D orL form; and wherein the peptide has a length of 14 to 30 amino acids. Infurther embodiments, X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P,L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S,Y(3-I), or Aib, in D or L form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V,I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R,A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle,Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), in D or L form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E,R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN),F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5is selected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH),Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K,N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected fromH, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, inD or L form; X8 is selected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip,DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), orAib, in D or L form; X9 is selected from L, A, I, K, V, F, N, Y, P, Aib,Hse, Hfe, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, or F(4-NH2), in D or L form; X10 isselected from Y, A, F, E, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Y(3-I),in D or L form; X11 is selected from G, E, Y, F, V, Bip, F(4-NH2), orAib, in D or L form; and X12 is selected from K, KK, Peg K, PEG(1×O),1,4-AMB, 1,3-AMB, 1,6-Hex, PEG, or GTE, in D or L form. In other cases,X12 is K.

In certain embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQ IDNO: 824), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 areindependently any amino acid; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form; andwherein the peptide has a length of 12 to 30 amino acids. In variousembodiments, X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), orAib, in D or L form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D,G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L,Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D,or K(Boc), in D or L form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip,F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2),F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 isselected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH),Y(34), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K, N,Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected from H,A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in Dor L form; X8 is selected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip,DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), orAib, in D or L form; X13 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, orAib, in D or L form; and X14 is selected from W, A, Y, 1-Nal, 2-Nal,thien-W, Tic, or W(5-OH), in D or L form. In certain cases, X13 isselected from H or T; and X14 is W.

In some embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including theamino acid sequence X16-X15-X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQID NO: 825), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 areindependently any amino acid; X15 and X16 independently comprise one tothree amino acids; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form; and wherein thepeptide has a length of 14 to 30 amino acids. In other embodiments, X1is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal,4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(34), or Aib, in D orL form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn,or Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P,Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), inD or L form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal,1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D,R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(34), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D orL form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, orb-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib,Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or L form; X8 isselected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr,H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D orL form; X13 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, or Aib, in D orL form; X14 is selected from W, A, Y, 1-Nal, 2-Nal, thien-W, Tic, orW(5-OH), in D or L form; X15 is selected from Q, G, A, D, S, P, K, GQ,K(G), K(Y.G), K(V.G). K(F.G), K(H.H), KK(K), Dpr, or Aib, in D or Lform; and X16 is selected from G, K, PP, GY, GV, GF, GH, GK(G), KK(K),Dpr, EAG, or PPG, in D or L form. In other cases, X15 is selected fromQ, D, or K(G); and X16 is G.

In further embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptide includingthe amino acid sequence G-Q-W-H-C-T-T-S-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G (SEQ ID NO:264); G-K(G)-W-H-C-T-T-K-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-Bip (SEQ ID NO: 400); orK-K-W-H-C-Y-T-Y-F-P-H-H-Y-C-V-Y-G (SEQ ID NO: 408).

In additional embodiments, the EMTG can include a cyclic peptideincluding the amino acid sequenceX1-X2-X3-C*-X4-T-X5-X6-P*-X7-H-X8-C-X9-X10-X11 (SEQ ID NO: 826), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are independently anyamino acid; C* is C or Pen; P* is P, L-hydroxyproline,piperidine-2-carboxylic acid, or 4-hydroxypiperidine-2-carboxylic acid;and; and wherein the peptide has a length of 16 to 30 amino acids. Incertain cases, X1 is selected from any amino acid in L form; X2 isselected from W or W*; X3 is selected from H, A, K, or S; X4 is selectedfrom T, Y, G, K, or Y*; X5 is selected from any amino acid in L form; X6is selected from F, Y, or Y*; X7 is selected from H, A, or Y; X8 isselected from Y or Y*; X9 is selected from L, V, L*, or Y*; X10 isselected from Y, F, or Y*; and X11 is selected from G, Y, Bip, or Y*;wherein W* is 1-Nal, 2-Nal, Bpa, thien-W, W(5-OH), 7-aza-Trp,1-methyl-Trp, 5-bromo-Tryp, 5-chloro-Tryp, 5-fluor-Trp, 7-methyl-trp,6-methyl-Trp, 6-fluoro-Trp, or 6-hydroxy-trp; Y* is F(4-NH2),F(3,4-OMe2), F(3-OMe), F(4-CF3), F(4-CN), F(4-NO2), F(4-F), F(4-NO2),Hfe, 4-tBu-F, 4-CO2H-F, h-Tyr, h-Tyr(Me), Y(2,6-Me2), Y(3-Cl), Y(3-I),Y(Bn, 3-Cl), 2-substituted L-Tyr, 2,3-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5-substituted-L-tyr, 2,5-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,6-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Tyr, 3-substituted-L-Tyr, 3,5-substituted-L-Tyr,2-substituted L-Phe, 2,3-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5-substituted-L-Phe,2,5-substituted-L-Phe, 2,6-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Phe,3-substituted-L-Phe, 3,5-substituted-L-Phe, L-2-pyridylalanine,L-3-pyridylalanine, or L-4-pyridylalanine; L* is I, V, A, L, G, Tle,L-norvaline, L-norleucine, L-dehydroleucine, L-abu (2-aminobutyricacid), L-tert-leucine, beta-cyclohexyl-L-alanine, L-homoleucine, orL-homo-cyclohexylalanine; and the substituent can be independentlyselected from alkyl, aryl, halogen, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, carboxy,amino, methoxy, or hydroxy. In certain cases, X1 is selected from Q orK(G); and X5 is selected from R, Y, L, D, or K.

The EMTG can include a cyclic peptide including the amino acid sequenceX1-X2-X3-C-X4-X5-D-X6-X7-X8-W-X9-C-X10-X11-X12 (SEQ ID NO: 827), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, and X12 are any aminoacid; and wherein the peptide has a length of 16 to 30 amino acids. Incertain embodiments, X1 is selected from any amino acid in L form; X2 isselected from W or W*; X3 is selected from T, A, or W; X4 is selectedfrom S, Y, A, V, or Y*; X5 is selected from G or D*; X6 is selected fromE, A, or H; X7 is selected from Y, L, or Y*; X8 is selected from T, Y,A, or S; X9 is selected from H, S, or Y; X10 is selected from N or A;X11 is selected from Y or Y*; X12 is selected from any amino acid in Lform; W* is 1-Nal, 2-Nal, Bpa, thien-W, W(5-OH), 7-aza-Trp,1-methyl-Trp, 5-bromo-Tryp, 5-chloro-Tryp, 5-fluor-Trp, 7-methyl-trp,6-methyl-Trp, 6-fluoro-Trp, or 6-hydroxy-trp; Y* is F(4-NH2),F(3,4-OMe2), F(3-OMe), F(4-CF3), F(4-CN), F(4-NO2), F(4-F), F(4-NO2),Hfe, 4-tBu-F, 4-CO2H-F, h-Tyr, h-Tyr(Me), Y(2,6-Me2), Y(3-Cl), Y(3-I),Y(Bn, 3-Cl), 2-substituted L-Tyr, 2,3-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5-substituted-L-tyr, 2,5-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,6-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Tyr, 3-substituted-L-Tyr, 3,5-substituted-L-Tyr,2-substituted L-Phe, 2,3-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5-substituted-L-Phe,2,5-substituted-L-Phe, 2,6-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Phe,3-substituted-L-Phe, 3,5-substituted-L-Phe, L-2-pyridylalanine,L-3-pyridylalanine, or L-4-pyridylalanine; D* is any amino acid in Dform; and the substituent can be independently selected from alkyl,aryl, halogen, alkoxy, cyano, nitro, carboxy, amino, methoxy, orhydroxy. In some embodiments, X1 is selected from Q or D; and X12 isselected from E or G.

In other embodiments, the diagnostic composition can include any of thesequences set forth in Tables 18-41, 44, and 45. In some cases, thediagnostic composition can have a structure set forth in Table 17, 42,or 43. In further embodiments, the diagnostic composition can beselected from Compound ID 800, Compound ID 801, Compound ID 802,Compound ID 803, Compound ID 807, Compound ID 808, Compound ID 816,Compound ID 813, Compound ID 815, Compound ID 1014, Compound ID 1004, orCompound ID 1013.

Also provided herein is a method of distinguishing fibrotic fromnon-fibrotic pathologies in an animal, the method includes: a)administering to the animal an effective amount of an MR-baseddiagnostic composition, the diagnostic composition comprising AnExtracellular Matrix Targeting Group (EMTG) and a physiologicallycompatible metal chelating group (C), wherein the EMTG exhibits anaffinity for collagen; b) acquiring a T1-weighted image of a tissue ofsaid animal at from about 1 minute to about 10 minutes afteradministration of the MR-based diagnostic composition; c) acquiring asecond T1-weighted image of the tissue of said animal at a time fromabout 10 minutes to about 2 hours after administration of the MR-baseddiagnostic composition; and d) evaluating differences between the imagesacquired in steps b) and c), wherein a non-fibrotic pathology exhibitsgreater loss in enhancement from the image collected in step b) to thatin step c) as compared to a fibrotic pathology.

In another embodiment, the method of distinguishing fibrotic fromnon-fibrotic pathologies in an animal includes: a) administering to theanimal an effective amount of an MR-based diagnostic composition, thediagnostic composition comprising An Extracellular Matrix TargetingGroup (EMTG) and a physiologically compatible metal chelating group (C),wherein the EMTG exhibits an affinity for collagen; b) acquiring aseries of T1-weighted images of the tissue of said animal for a timefrom about 1 minute to about 2 hours after administration of theMR-based diagnostic composition; and c) evaluating differences betweenthe images acquired in step b), wherein a non-fibrotic pathologyexhibits greater loss in enhancement in an image collected earlier intime compared to an image collected later in time, as compared to afibrotic pathology.

In the above methods, the pathology can be selected from cancer, liverfibrosis, kidney fibrosis, pulmonary fibrosis, and myocardialinfarction. In some cases, the collagen can be type I or type IIIcollagen.

In alternative embodiments, a method of imaging a myocardial infarct inan animal is disclosed. The method includes: a) optionally acquiring abaseline image of the myocardium of said animal; b) administering to theanimal an effective amount of an MR-based diagnostic composition, thediagnostic composition comprising An Extracellular Matrix TargetingGroup (EMTG) and a physiologically compatible metal chelating group (C),wherein the EMTG exhibits an affinity for collagen; c) acquiring animage of the myocardium during administration to about 2 hours afteradministration of the MR-based diagnostic composition; and d)identifying infarcted regions of the myocardium by enhancement of signalin the image of step c) as compared to other regions of the myocardiumand/or the optional baseline image of step a). In some cases, theMR-based diagnostic composition is administered as a bolus. The image ofstep c) can be obtained within about 10 minutes, from about 10 minutesto about 40 minutes, or about one hour following administration of theMR-based diagnostic composition.

In some embodiments, a cardiac-gated gradient inversion recoverysequence is used to obtain the image. Enhancement can be at least 10times greater than that observed in an optional baseline image.

Additionally, a method of distinguishing a benign from a malignantbreast tumor in an animal is provided, the method includes: a)administering to the animal an effective amount of an MR-baseddiagnostic composition, the diagnostic composition comprising AnExtracellular Matrix Targeting Group (EMTG) and a physiologicallycompatible metal chelating group (C), wherein the EMTG exhibits anaffinity for the component of an extracellular matrix of the tumortissue; b) acquiring a series of T1-weighted image of the breast tissueof said animal for a time from about 1 minutes to about 2 hours afteradministration of the MR-based diagnostic composition; and c) evaluatingdifferences between the images acquired in steps b), wherein a malignanttumor exhibits greater loss in enhancement in an image collected earlierin time compared to an image collected later in time, as compared to abenign tumor.

In another embodiment, the method of distinguishing a benign from amalignant breast tumor in an animal includes: a) administering to theanimal an effective amount of an MR-based diagnostic composition, thediagnostic composition comprising An Extracellular Matrix TargetingGroup (EMTG) and a physiologically compatible metal chelating group (C),wherein the EMTG exhibits an affinity for the component of anextracellular matrix of the tumor tissue; b) acquiring a T1-weightedimage of the breast tissue of said animal at from about 1 minute toabout 10 minutes after administration of the MR-based diagnosticcomposition; c) acquiring a second T1-weighted image of the breasttissue of said animal at a time from about 10 minutes to about 2 hoursafter administration of the MR-based diagnostic composition; and d)evaluating differences between the images acquired in steps b) and c),wherein a malignant tumor exhibits greater loss in enhancement from theimage collected in step b) to that in step c) as compared to a benigntumor.

In an additional embodiment, a method of imaging fibrosis in an animalincludes: a) optionally acquiring a baseline image of a tissue of saidanimal; b) administering to the animal an effective amount of anMR-based diagnostic composition, the diagnostic composition comprisingAn Extracellular Matrix Targeting Group (EMTG) and a physiologicallycompatible metal chelating group (C), wherein the EMTG exhibits anaffinity for collagen; c) acquiring an image of the tissue duringadministration to about 2 hours after administration of the MR-baseddiagnostic composition; d) identifying infarcted regions of fibrosis byenhancement of signal in the image of step c) as compared to otherregions of the tissue and/or the optional baseline image of step a).

Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used hereinhave the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill inthe art to which this invention belongs. Although methods and materialssimilar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in thepractice or testing of the present invention, suitable methods andmaterials are described below. All publications, patent applications,patents, and other references mentioned herein are incorporated byreference in their entirety. In case of conflict, the presentspecification, including definitions, will control. In addition, themethods, materials, and examples are illustrative only and not intendedto be limiting.

The details of one or more embodiments of the invention are set forth inthe accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features,objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from thedescription and drawings, and from the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is in vivo short-axis images from a mouse heart pre- andpost-injection of compound ID 800.

FIG. 2 is a graph demonstrating the signal to noise ratios (SNR) versustime for myocardium and blood generated from the images in FIG. 1.

FIG. 3 is a graph displaying the contrast to noise ratios (CNR) formyocardium versus blood generated from the images in FIG. 1.

FIG. 4 is in vivo short-axis images from a mouse heart with a 7-day oldinfarction pre- and post-injection of compound ID 800.

FIG. 5 shows a panel of pre- and post compound ID 800 images for micewith 7 day, 40 day, or 210 day infarcts. The images show that compoundID 800 enhances the myocardium relative to the pre-contrast image. Thecompound ID 800 enhanced images show the infarct zone as hyperintenserelative to the normal, viable myocardium. These images demonstrate thatthe collagen targeted contrast agent can be used to demonstrateviability in infarctions of different ages from relatively acute tochronic.

FIG. 6 shows that the picrosirius stained myocardium correlates verywell with the MR image. The collagen rich scar stained darkly bypicrosirius red appears hyperenhanced (bright) on the MR image.

FIG. 7 illustrates example images from the mid-cavity of the heart.Prior to compound ID 1014 injection, the myocardium and ventricles areboth dark. Five minutes after injection the ventricles are hyperintensebecause of contrast agent in the blood and the myocardium shows a dark,ischemic zone in anterior and anteroseptal segments 7 and 8 whereas theinferior and lateral wall is much more enhanced. At 20 minutes, thesignal in the blood has decreased but the myocardium remains dark insegments 7 and 8 and brighter in segments 9-12.

FIG. 8 shows example images from the mid-cavity of the heart.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION Definitions

Commonly used chemical abbreviations that are not explicitly defined inthis disclosure may be found in The American Chemical Society StyleGuide, Second Edition; American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.(1997), “2001 Guidelines for Authors” J. Org. Chem. 66(1), 24A (2001),“A Short Guide to Abbreviations and Their Use in Peptide Science” J.Peptide. Sci. 5, 465-471 (1999).

For the purposes of this application, the term “aliphatic” describes anyacyclic or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranchedcarbon compound, excluding aromatic compounds.

The term “alkyl” includes saturated aliphatic groups, includingstraight-chain alkyl groups (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl,hexyl, heptyl, octyl, nonyl, decyl, etc.), branched-chain alkyl groups(isopropyl, tert-butyl, isobutyl, etc.), cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups(cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl), alkylsubstituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups.The term alkyl further includes alkyl groups, which can further includeoxygen, nitrogen, sulfur or phosphorous atoms replacing one or morecarbons of the hydrocarbon backbone. In certain embodiments, a straightchain or branched chain alkyl has 6 or fewer carbon atoms in itsbackbone (e.g., C₁-C₆ for straight chain, C₃-C₆ for branched chain), andmore preferably 4 or fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloalkyls have from3-8 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5 or6 carbons in the ring structure. The term C₁-C₆ includes alkyl groupscontaining 1 to 6 carbon atoms.

Moreover, the term “alkyl” includes both “unsubstituted alkyls” and“substituted alkyls,” the latter of which refers to alkyl moietieshaving substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of thehydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example,alkenyl, alkynyl, halogen, hydroxyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, arylcarbonyloxy,alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy, carboxylate, alkylcarbonyl,arylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl,dialkylaminocarbonyl, alkylthiocarbonyl, alkoxyl, phosphate,phosphonato, phosphinato, cyano, amino (including alkyl amino,dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, and alkylarylamino), acylamino(including alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, carbamoyl and ureido),amidino, imino, sulfhydryl, alkylthio, arylthio, thiocarboxylate,sulfates, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonato, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, nitro,trifluoromethyl, cyano, azido, heterocyclyl, alkylaryl, or an aromaticor heteroaromatic moiety. Cycloalkyls can be further substituted, e.g.,with the substituents described above. An “arylalkyl” moiety is an alkylsubstituted with an aryl (e.g., phenylmethyl(benzyl)). The term “alkyl”also includes the side chains of natural and unnatural amino acids. Theterm “n-alkyl” means a straight chain (i.e., unbranched) unsubstitutedalkyl group.

The term “alkenyl” includes aliphatic groups that may or may not besubstituted, as described above for alkyls, containing at least onedouble bond and at least two carbon atoms. For example, the term“alkenyl” includes straight-chain alkenyl groups (e.g., ethylenyl,propenyl, butenyl, pentenyl, hexenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, nonenyl,decenyl, etc.), branched-chain alkenyl groups, cycloalkenyl (alicyclic)groups (cyclopropenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl,cyclooctenyl), alkyl or alkenyl substituted cycloalkenyl groups, andcycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl substituted alkenyl groups. The term alkenylfurther includes alkenyl groups that include oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur orphosphorous atoms replacing one or more carbons of the hydrocarbonbackbone. In certain embodiments, a straight chain or branched chainalkenyl group has 6 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C₂-C₆for straight chain, C₃-C₆ for branched chain). Likewise, cycloalkenylgroups may have from 3-8 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and morepreferably have 5 or 6 carbons in the ring structure. The term C₂-C₆includes alkenyl groups containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms.

Moreover, the term alkenyl includes both “unsubstituted alkenyls” and“substituted alkenyls,” the latter of which refers to alkenyl moietieshaving substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of thehydrocarbon backbone. Such substituents can include, for example, alkylgroups, alkynyl groups, halogens, hydroxyl, alkylcarbonyloxy,arylcarbonyloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy, aryloxycarbonyloxy, carboxylate,alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl,alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, alkylthiocarbonyl, alkoxyl,phosphate, phosphonato, phosphinato, cyano, amino (including alkylamino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, and alkylarylamino),acylamino (including alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, carbamoyland ureido), amidino, imino, sulfhydryl, alkylthio, arylthio,thiocarboxylate, sulfates, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonato, sulfamoyl,sulfonamido, nitro, trifluoromethyl, cyano, azido, heterocyclyl,alkylaryl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety.

The term “alkynyl” includes unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous inlength and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, butwhich contain at least one triple bond and two carbon atoms. Forexample, the term “alkynyl” includes straight-chain alkynyl groups(e.g., ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, heptynyl, octynyl,nonynyl, decynyl, etc.), branched-chain alkynyl groups, and cycloalkylor cycloalkenyl substituted alkynyl groups. The term alkynyl furtherincludes alkynyl groups that include oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur orphosphorous atoms replacing one or more carbons of the hydrocarbonbackbone. In certain embodiments, a straight chain or branched chainalkynyl group has 6 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C₂-C₆for straight chain, C₃-C₆ for branched chain). The term C₂-C₆ includesalkynyl groups containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms.

In general, the term “aryl” includes groups, including 5- and 6-memberedsingle-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to fourheteroatoms, for example, benzene, phenyl, pyrrole, furan, thiophene,thiazole, isothiaozole, imidazole, triazole, tetrazole, pyrazole,oxazole, isooxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, and pyrimidine, andthe like. Furthermore, the term “aryl” includes multicyclic aryl groups,e.g., tricyclic, bicyclic, such as naphthalene, benzoxazole,benzodioxazole, benzothiazole, benzoimidazole, benzothiophene,methylenedioxyphenyl, quinoline, isoquinoline, napthridine, indole,benzofuran, purine, benzofuran, deazapurine, or indolizine. Those arylgroups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred toas “aryl heterocycles,” “heterocycles,” “heteroaryls,” or“heteroaromatics.” An aryl group may be substituted at one or more ringpositions with substituents.

For the purposes of this application, “DTPA” refers to a chemicalcompound comprising a substructure composed of diethylenetriamine,wherein the two primary amines are each covalently attached to twoacetyl groups and the secondary amine has one acetyl group covalentlyattached according to the following formula:

wherein each X is independently a functional group capable ofcoordinating a metal cation, preferably COO⁻, COOH, C(O)NH₂, C(O)NHR,C(O)NRR′, PO₃ ²⁻, PO₃R⁻, P(R)O₂ ⁻ or NHR, or OR wherein R is anyaliphatic group. When each X group is the tert-butoxy (^(t)Bu)carboxylate ester (COO^(t)Bu), the structure may be referred to as“DTPE” (“E” for ester).

For the purposes of this application, “DOTA” refers to a chemicalcompound comprising a substructure composed of1,4,7,11-tetraazacyclododecane, wherein the amines each have one acetylgroup covalently attached according to the following formula:

wherein X is defined above.

For the purposes of this application, “NOTA” refers to a chemicalcompound comprising a substructure composed of 1,4,7-triazacyclononane,wherein the amines each have one acetyl group covalently attachedaccording to the following formula:

wherein X is defined above.

For the purposes of this application, “DO3A” refers to a chemicalcompound comprising a substructure composed of1,4,7,11-tetraazacyclododecane, wherein three of the four amines eachhave one acetyl group covalently attached and the other amine has asubstituent having neutral charge according to the following formula:

wherein R¹ is an uncharged chemical moiety, preferably hydrogen, anyaliphatic, alkyl group, or cycloalkyl group, and uncharged derivativesthereof. The chelate “HP”-DO3A has R¹=—CH₂(CHOH)CH₃.

In each of the four structures above, the carbon atoms of the indicatedethylenes may be referred to as “backbone” carbons. The designation“bbDTPA” may be used to refer to the location of a chemical bond to aDTPA molecule (“bb” for “back bone”). Note that as used herein,bb(CO)DTPA-Gd means a C═O moiety bound to an ethylene backbone carbonatom of DTPA.

The terms “chelating ligand,” “chelating moiety,” and “chelate moiety”may be used to refer to any polydentate ligand which is capable ofcoordinating a metal ion, including DTPA (and DTPE), DOTA, DO3A, DOTAGA,Glu-DTPA, or NOTA molecule, or any other suitable polydentate chelatingligand as is further defined herein, that is either coordinating a metalion or is capable of doing so, either directly or after removal ofprotecting groups. The term “chelate” refers to the actual metal-ligandcomplex, and it is understood that the polydentate ligand willeventually be coordinated to a medically useful metal ion.

The term “specific binding affinity” as used herein, refers to thecapacity of a peptide or composition to be taken up by, retained by, orbound to a particular biological component to a greater degree thanother components. Peptides that have this property are said to be“targeted” to the “target” component. Peptides that lack this propertyare said to be “non-specific” or “non-targeted” agents. The bindingaffinity for a target is expressed in terms of the equilibriumdissociation constant “Kd” or as a percentage of the compound bound tothe target under a defined set of conditions.

The term “relaxivity” as used herein, refers to the increase in eitherof the MRI quantities 1/T1 or 1/T2 per millimolar (mM) concentration ofparamagnetic ion, contrast agent, therapeutic agent, or diagnosticcomposition, wherein T1 is the longitudinal or spin-lattice, relaxationtime, and T2 is the transverse or spin-spin relaxation time of waterprotons or other imaging or spectroscopic nuclei, including protonsfound in molecules other than water. Relaxivity is expressed in units ofmM⁻¹s⁻¹.

As used herein, the term “purified” refers to a peptide that has beenseparated from either naturally occurring organic molecules with whichit normally associates or, for a chemically-synthesized peptide,separated from any other organic molecules present in the chemicalsynthesis. Typically, the polypeptide is considered “purified” when itis at least 70% (e.g., 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 99%), by dry weight, freefrom any other proteins or organic molecules. The terms “purified” and“isolated” are used interchangeably herein.

As used herein, the term “peptide” refers to a chain of amino acids thatis about 2 to about 75 amino acids in length (e.g., 3 to 50 amino acids,1 to 50 amino acids, 3 to 30 amino acids, 2 to 25 amino acids, 10-25amino acids, 10-50 amino acids, 15-25 amino acids, 8-20 amino acids,8-15 amino acids, 16-17 amino acids). All peptide sequences herein arewritten from the N to C terminus. Additionally, peptides containing twoor more cysteine residues can form disulfide bonds under non-reducingconditions. Formation of the disulfide bond can result in the formationof a cyclic peptide. The cyclic peptide may represent all or a portionof the peptide sequence. A peptide as described herein can be branched,e.g., have additional amino acids linked to one or more of the sidechains of an amino acid in the chain. For example, a lysine residuehaving an additional lysine residue off of the ε-amino group, such afunctionality is represented as K(K), wherein the group in theparentheses is that which is linked off of a side chain. Where more thanone amino acid is bound off of the side chain, it is represented with aperiod separating the two amino acids, e.g., K(Y.G). In certainembodiments, a chelating group or a metal containing chelating group maybe linked to one or more side chains of an amino acid. For example, alysine residue having a GdDTPA complex off of the ε-aminogroup, such afunctionality is represented as K(Gd^(DTPA)), wherein the group inparenthesis is that which is linked off of a side chain.

Additionally, an amino acid can be substituted. Such substituents caninclude, for example, alkenyl, alkynyl, halogen, hydroxyl,alkylcarbonyloxy, arylcarbonyloxy, alkoxycarbonyloxy,aryloxycarbonyloxy, carboxylate, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl,alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl,alkylthiocarbonyl, alkoxyl, phosphate, phosphonato, phosphinato, cyano,amino (including alkyl amino, dialkylamino, arylamino, diarylamino, andalkylarylamino), acylamino (including alkylcarbonylamino,arylcarbonylamino, carbamoyl and ureido), amidino, imino, sulfhydryl,alkylthio, arylthio, thiocarboxylate, sulfates, alkylsulfinyl,sulfonato, sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, nitro, trifluoromethyl, cyano, azido,heterocyclyl, alkylaryl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety.Cycloalkyls can be further substituted, e.g., with the substituentsdescribed above. An “arylalkyl” moiety is an alkyl substituted with anaryl (e.g., phenylmethyl(benzyl)). The term “alkyl” also includes theside chains of natural and unnatural amino acids. The term “n-alkyl”means a straight chain (i.e., unbranched) unsubstituted alkyl group.

As used herein, the term “natural” or “naturally occurring” amino acidrefers to one of the twenty most common occurring amino acids. Naturalamino acids modified to provide a label for detection purposes (e.g.,radioactive labels, optical labels, or dyes) are considered to benatural amino acids. Natural amino acids are referred to by theirstandard one- or three-letter abbreviations. Natural amino acids can bein their D or L form. As used herein, a lower case one or two letterabbreviation refers to the D-form of an amino acid.

The terms “target binding” and “binding” for purposes herein refer tonon-covalent interactions of a peptide with a target. These non-covalentinteractions are independent from one another and may be, inter alia,hydrophobic, hydrophilic, dipole-dipole, pi-stacking, hydrogen bonding,electrostatic associations, or Lewis acid-base interactions.

As used herein, all references to “Gd,” “gado,” or “gadolinium” mean theGd(III) paramagnetic metal ion.

Collagen Binding Peptides

Isolated peptides described herein have an affinity for an extracellularmatrix protein, such as collagen, including human collagen type I. Insome embodiments, an isolated peptide has a specific binding affinityfor an extracellular matrix protein such as collagen relative to serumproteins, such as human serum albumin (HSA) and/or fibrinogen. In theseembodiments, the peptide may exhibit a smaller dissociation constant foran extracellular matrix protein relative to the dissociation constantfor a serum protein.

Extracellular matrix proteins include soluble and insoluble proteins,polysaccharides, including heteropolysaccharides and polysaccharidescovalently bound to proteins, and cell-surface receptors. For example,extracellular matrix proteins can be collagens (Types I, II, III, IV, V,and VI), elastin, decorin, glycosoaminoglycans, and proteoglycans.

Collagens are particularly useful extracellular matrix proteins totarget. For example, collagens I and III are the most abundantcomponents of the extracellular matrix of myocardial tissue,representing over 90% of total myocardial collagen and about 5% of drymyocardial weight. The ratio of collagen I to collagen III in themyocardium is approximately 2:1, and their total concentration isapproximately 100 μM in the extracellular matrix. Human collagen type Iis a trimer of two chains with an [α1(I)]₂[α2(I)] stoichiometrycharacterized by a repeating G-X-Y sequence motif, where X is mostfrequently proline and Y is frequently hydroxyproline. Thus, in someembodiments, a peptide has an affinity for human and/or rat collagentype I.

Peptides useful for inclusion in the diagnostic compositions describedherein can include natural or unnatural amino acids which may be in theD or L form. In some embodiments, all of the amino acids are naturalamino acids. In some embodiments, all of the amino acids are in the Lform. The peptides can be synthesized according to standard synthesismethods such as those disclosed in, e.g., WO 01/09188 and WO 01/08712.Charged groups on the peptides can be neutralized if desired. Forexample, the C-terminal carboxylate moiety can be amidated with an —NH₂group, yielding a C(═O)NH₂ moiety. In certain embodiments, theC-terminus is amidated via cleavage of the peptide from the resin; seethe Examples, below. For ease of synthesis and cost considerations, itis preferred that the peptides have between 3 to 75 amino acids (e.g., 3to 50, 1 to 50, 10 to 50, 10 to 30, 3 to 30, 3 to 20, 3 to 15, 5 to 30,3 to 25, 16 to 17, 5 to 25, 5 to 20, 5 to 15, 11 to 25, 11 to 50, 11 to40, 10 to 12, 8 to 30, 8 to 20, or 8 to 15 amino acids in length).

Amino acids with many different protecting groups appropriate forimmediate use in the solid phase synthesis of peptides are commerciallyavailable. Concatemers of peptides (2-5 or more) can increase bindingaffinity and specificity for an extracellular matrix protein(Verrecchio, A., Germann, M. W., Schick, B. P., Kung, B., Twardowski,T., and San Antonio, J. D. J. Biol. Chem. (2000) 275, 7701-7707).

Peptides can be assayed for affinity to the appropriate extracellularmatrix protein by methods as disclosed in WO 01/09188 and WO 01/08712,and as described below. For example, peptides can be screened forbinding to an extracellular matrix protein by methods well known in theart, including equilibrium dialysis, affinity chromatography, andinhibition or displacement of probes bound to the matrix protein. Forexample, peptides can be evaluated for their ability to bind tocollagen, such as dried human collagen type I or dried rat collagen typeI. In certain cases, a peptide can exhibit a percent binding to driedhuman collagen type I or dried rat collagen type I (see assays describedbelow) of greater than 10%, e.g., greater than 12%, greater than 15%,greater than 20%, greater than 25%, greater than 30%, greater than 35%,greater than 40%, greater than 45%, greater than 50%, greater than 55%,greater than 60%, greater than 65%, greater than 70%, greater than 75%,greater than 80%, or greater than 85%. In some embodiments, a peptidecan exhibit a percent binding to dried human collagen in the range offrom about 10% to about 50%, or from about 20% to about 60%, or fromabout 30% to about 60%, or from about 40% to about 90%. Certain peptidesuseful for inclusion in the diagnostic compositions herein can exhibitan affinity for collagen. Such peptides can be identified through phagedisplay experiments; see the Examples, below.

Collagen binding peptides can be derivatized with non-metallicradionuclides for PET or SPECT imaging. For instance the tyrosine aminoacid can be iodinated with I-123, I-125, or I-131 as described in theExamples. Flourine-18 can be incorporated into the peptide usingfluorination and bioconjugation techniques as described in theliterature (see e.g. Guenther K J, Yoganathan S, Garofalo R, Kawabata T,Strack T, Labiris R, Dolovich M, Chirakal R, Valliant J F. “Synthesisand in vitro evaluation of 18F- and 19F-labeled insulin: a newradiotracer for PET-based molecular imaging studies.” J Med Chem. 200649:1466-74; de Bruin B, Kuhnast B, Hinnen F, Yaouancq L, Amessou M,Johannes L, Samson A, Boisgard R, Tavitian B, Dolle F.“1-[3-(2-[18F]fluoropyridin-3-yloxy)propyl]pyrrole-2,5-dione: design,synthesis, and radiosynthesis of a new [18F]fluoropyridine-basedmaleimide reagent for the labeling of peptides and proteins.” BioconjugChem. 2005 16:406-20; Chen X, Park R, Hou Y, Khankaldyyan V,Gonzales-Gomez I, Tohme M, Bading J R, Laug W E, Conti P S. “MicroPETimaging of brain tumor angiogenesis with 18F-labeled PEGylated RGDpeptide.” Eur J Nucl Med Mol. Imaging. 2004 31:1081-9; Wester H J,Schottelius M, Scheidhauer K, Meisetschlager G, Herz M, Rau F C, Reubi JC, Schwaiger M. “PET imaging of somatostatin receptors: design,synthesis and preclinical evaluation of a novel 18F-labelled,carbohydrated analogue of octreotide.” Eur J Nucl Med Mol. Imaging. 200330(1):117-22).

Peptides disclosed herein can include the amino acid sequenceW-X1-C-(X2)_(n)-W-X3-C (SEQ ID NO: 806), wherein n=5-7; X1, X2, and X3are any amino acid; and wherein the peptide has a length of 11 to 50amino acids. In some embodiments, the peptide can have a length of 11 to30 amino acids, 11 to 35 amino acids, 11 to 25 amino acids, 11 to 20amino acids, or 11 to 15 amino acids. In certain embodiments, X1 isselected from K, Q, Y, T, E, D, L, R, H, I, V, N, M, and A. Similarly,X2 is in some cases selected from R, E, D, S, H, K, N, Y, M, V, I, Q,and G. In certain cases, X1 is selected from M, K, Q, T, Y, and R, andX3 is selected from Y, K, H, V, S, N, and M.

A purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceW-X1-C-X2-G*-X3-X4-X5-X6-W-X7-C (SEQ ID NO: 807), wherein X1 is anyamino acid; X2 can be S, V, T, H, R, Y, or D; G* is G or any amino acidin D form; X3 can be D or N, independently in D or L form; X4 can be anyamino acid in D or L form; X5 can be any amino acid in D or L form; X6can be T, K, H, D, A, R, Y, or E; and X7 can be Y, K, H, V, S, M, or N,wherein the peptide has a total length of 12 to 50 amino acids. Thepeptide length can vary, as indicated previously, e.g., 12 to 25 aminoacids, 12 to 30 amino acids, 12 to 40 amino acids, 12 to 20 amino acids,and 12 to 15 amino acids. In some cases, G* is selected from G and the Dform of the amino acids A, S, R, Y, and L.

In some embodiments, such a purified peptide can include the amino acidsequence: W-X1-C-X2-G*-X3-X4-X5-X6-W-X7-C-X8-X9 (SEQ ID NO: 808),wherein X1 to X6 and G* are as defined above for SEQ ID NO: 807; X8 canbe N, L, I, R, K, or A; and X9 can be Y, F, M, R, or H, independently inD or L form. In some cases, X3 can be D. In some embodiments, X1 can beT; X2 can be S, T or V; X4 can be E, H, I, S, or A; X5 can be Y, K, L,F, A, or P; X6 is T; X7 is H or K; X8 is N, K, or A; and X9 is Y or F.In some embodiments, the peptide can include one of the following aminoacid sequences:

W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C; (SEQ ID NO: 809) W-T-C-V-G-D-H-K-T-W-K-C;(SEQ ID NO: 810) W-Y-C-S-G-D-H-L-D-W-K-C; (SEQ ID NO: 811) andW-E-C-H-G-N-E-F-E-W-N-C. (SEQ ID NO: 812)

A purified peptide can include any of the amino acid sequences in Tables1-16, 18-41, 44, and 45. In some embodiments, such peptides have a totallength of 50 amino acids or less, e.g., 45 amino acids or less, 40 aminoacids or less, 35 amino acids or less, 30 amino acids or less, 25 aminoacids or less, 20 amino acids or less, or 15 amino acids or less.

A purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceQ-W-H-C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G (SEQ ID NO: 74), wherein the peptide hasa total length of 16 to 50 amino acids, e.g., 16 to 40 amino acids, 16to 30 amino acids, 16 to 20 amino acids, or 16 to 18 amino acids.

In other cases, a purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceC-Y-Q-X1-X2-C-W-X3-W (SEQ ID NO: 813), wherein X1 is any amino acid; X2is any amino acid; X3 is any amino acid; wherein each C, Y, Q, W, X1,X2, or X3, independently, can be in the D form; and wherein the peptidecontains 9 to 50 amino acids, such as 9 to 40 amino acids, 9 to 30 aminoacids, 9 to 20 amino acids, or 9 to 15 amino acids. In some cases, X1 isselected from A, G, I, L, V, F, and P; X2 is selected from G, A, I, L,V, F, and P; and X3 is selected from I, A, G, L, V, F, and P. In certainembodiments, the peptide includes the amino acid sequenceC-Y-Q-A-G-C-W-1-W (SEQ ID NO: 814) in any combination of D or L formsfor the individual amino acids. For example, a peptide can include SEQID NO: 814 in all L-form.

A purified peptide can include amino acid sequenceY-X1-X2-C-Y-Q-X3-X4-C-W-X5-W (SEQ ID NO: 815), wherein X1 is any aminoacid; X2 is any amino acid; X3 is any amino acid; X4 is any amino acid;X5 is I, G, L, V, F, or P; and wherein the peptide contains 12 to 50amino acids, such as 12 to 40 amino acids, 12 to 30 amino acids, 12 to25 amino acids, 12 to 20 amino acids, or 12 to 15 amino acids. In someembodiments, X1 is selected from H, R, K, E, D, Q, or N; X2 is selectedfrom A, G, I, L, V, F, or P; X3 is selected from A, G, I, L, V, F, or P;X4 is selected from G, A, I, L, V, F, or P; and X5 is selected from I,L, V, or F. For example, a purified peptide can include SEQ ID NO:1, SEQID NO: 132, or SEQ ID NO: 135. Other peptides are set forth in theaccompanying claims.

A purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceC*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQ ID NO: 816), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4,X5, X6, X7, and X8 are any amino acid; C* is C or Pen in D or L form;and the peptide has a length of 10 to 50 amino acids, such as 10 to 20amino acids, 10 to 30 amino acids, 10 to 40 amino acids, and 10 to 15amino acids. In some cases, X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G,R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl),b-h-S, Y(34), and Aib, in D or L form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S,Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, and Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selectedfrom R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa,Tle, Cit, b-h-D, and K(Boc), in D or L form; X4 is selected from F, A,Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN),F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, and b-h-E, in D or L form; X5is selected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH),Y(34), b-h-Y, and Aib, in D or L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K,N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, and b-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected fromH, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), andb-h-W, in D or L form; and X8 is selected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S,P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2),Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form. For example, a peptide can beC-T-T-S-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO: 817), C-T-T-K-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO:818), C-Y-T-Y-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ ID NO: 819), C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C (SEQ IDNO: 820), or C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C (SEQ ID NO: 821). In anotherembodiment, a purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceC*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11 (SEQ ID NO: 822), wherein X1,X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are any amino acid; C* is Cor Pen, in D or L form; and the peptide has a length of 13 to 50 aminoacids, such as 13 to 40 amino acids, 13 to 30 amino acids, 13 to 20amino acids, and 13 to 17 amino acids. In certain embodiments, X1 isselected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F,4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(34), and Aib, in D or L form;X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, andDpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib,Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, and K(Boc), in D orL form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal,1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, and b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D,R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(34), b-h-Y, and Aib, in Dor L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, andb-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib,Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), and b-h-W, in D or L form; X8 isselected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr,H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), and Aib, in Dor L form; X9 is selected from L, A, I, K, V, F, N, Y, P, Aib, Hse, Hfe,Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, and F(4-NH2), in D or L form; X10 is selectedfrom Y, A, F, E, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, F(4-NH2), and Y(34), in D orL form; and X11 is selected from G, E, Y, F, V, Bip, F(4-NH2), and Aib,in D or L form.

A purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceC*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11-X12 (SEQ ID NO: 823), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are any amino acids;X12 is any one or two amino acids; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form; andwherein the peptide has a length of 14 to 50 amino acids, such as 14 to40 amino acids, 14 to 30 amino acids, 14 to 20 amino acids, and 14 to 17amino acids. In some embodiments, X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I, S,Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl),b-h-S, Y(34), and Aib, in D or L form; X2 is selected from T, A, N, S,Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, and Dpr, in D or L form; X3 is selectedfrom R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa,Tle, Cit, b-h-D, and K(Boc), in D or L form; X4 is selected from F, A,Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN),F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, and b-h-E, in D or L form; X5is selected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH),Y(34), b-h-Y, and Aib, in D or L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K,N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, and b-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected fromH, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), andb-h-W, in D or L form; X8 is selected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P,1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip,F(4-NH2), and Aib, in D or L form; X9 is selected from L, A, I, K, V, F,N, Y, P, Aib, Hse, Hfe, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, and F(4-NH2), in D orL form; X10 is selected from Y, A, F, E, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip,F(4-NH2), and Y(34), in D or L form; X11 is selected from G, E, Y, F, V,Bip, F(4-NH2), and Aib, in D or L form; and X12 is selected from K, KK,Peg K, PEG(1×O), 1,4-AMB, 1,3-AMB, 1,6-Hex, PEG, and GTE, in D or Lform.

In another embodiment, a purified peptide includes the amino acidsequence X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQ ID NO: 824), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 are any amino acid; C* is Cor Pen, in D or L form; and wherein the peptide has a length of 12 to 50amino acids, such as 12 to 40 amino acids, 12 to 30 amino acids, 12 to20 amino acids, and 12 to 17 amino acids. In certain embodiments, X1 isselected from T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F,4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(34), and Aib, in D or L form;X2 is selected from T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, andDpr, in D or L form; X3 is selected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib,Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, and K(Boc), in D orL form; X4 is selected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal,1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, and b-h-E, in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D,R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(34), b-h-Y, and Aib, in Dor L form; X6 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, andb-h-T, in D or L form; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib,Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), and b-h-W, in D or L form; X8 isselected from Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr,H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), and Aib, in Dor L form; X13 is selected from H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, and Aib, in Dor L form; and X14 is selected from W, A, Y, 1-Nal, 2-Nal, thien-W, Tic,or W(5-OH), in D or L form.

A purified peptide can include the amino acid sequenceX16-X15-X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C* (SEQ ID NO: 825), whereinX1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 are any amino acid; X15 andX16 comprise one to three amino acids; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form;and wherein the peptide has a length of 14 to 50 amino acids, such as 14to 40 amino acids, 14 to 30 amino acids, 14 to 20 amino acids, and 14 to17 amino acids. In some embodiments, X1 is selected from T, A, K, V, I,S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn,3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), and Aib, in D or L form; X2 is selected from T, A,N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, and Dpr, in D or L form; X3 isselected from R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu,F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, and K(Boc), in D or L form; X4 isselected from F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2),Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, and b-h-E,in D or L form; X5 is selected from P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro,Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(34), b-h-Y, and Aib, in D or L form; X6 isselected from H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, and b-h-T, in D or Lform; X7 is selected from H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal,thien-W, W(5-OH), and b-h-W, in D or L form; X8 is selected from Y, A,R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe),Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), and Aib, in D or L form; X13 isselected from H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, and Aib, in D or L form; X14 isselected from W, A, Y, 1-Nal, 2-Nal, thien-W, Tic, or W(5-OH), in D or Lform; X15 is selected from Q, G, A, D, S, P, K, GQ, K(G), K(Y.G),K(V.G). K(F.G), K(H.H), KK(K), Dpr, and Aib, in D or L form; and X16 isselected from G, K, PP, GY, GV, GF, GH, GK(G), KK(K), Dpr, EAG, and PPG,in D or L form.

In other embodiments, a purified peptide can include the amino acidsequence X1-X2-X3-C*-X4-T-X5-X6-P*-X7-H—X8-C-X9-X10-X11 (SEQ ID NO:826), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are anyamino acid; C* is C or Pen; P* is P in D or L form; and wherein thepeptide has a length of 16 to 50 amino acids, such as 16 to 40 aminoacids, 16 to 30 amino acids, 16 to 20 amino acids, and 16 to 17 aminoacids. In certain embodiments, X1 is selected from any amino acid in Lform; X2 is selected from W or W*; X3 is selected from H, A, K, or S; X4is selected from T, Y, G, K, and Y*; X5 is selected from any amino acidin L form; X6 is selected from F, Y, and Y*; X7 is selected from H, A,and Y; X8 is selected from Y and Y*; X9 is selected from L, V, L*, andY*; X10 is selected from Y, F, and Y*; and X11 is selected from G, Y,Bip, and Y*; wherein W* is 1-Nal, 2-Nal, Bpa, thien-W, W(5-OH),7-aza-Trp, 1-methyl-Trp, 5-bromo-Tryp, 5-chloro-Tryp, 5-fluor-Trp,7-methyl-trp, 6-methyl-Trp, 6-fluoro-Trp, or 6-hydroxy-trp; Y* isF(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe2), F(3-OMe), F(4-CF3), F(4-CN), F(4-NO2), F(4-F),F(4-NO2), Hfe, 4-tBu-F, 4-CO2H-F, h-Tyr, h-Tyr(Me), Y(2,6-Me2), Y(3-Cl),Y(3-I), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), 2-substituted L-Tyr, 2,3-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5-substituted-L-tyr, 2,5-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,6-substituted-L-Tyr,2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Tyr, 3-substituted-L-Tyr, 3,5-substituted-L-Tyr,2-substituted L-Phe, 2,3-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5-substituted-L-Phe,2,5-substituted-L-Phe, 2,6-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Phe,3-substituted-L-Phe, 3,5-substituted-L-Phe, L-2-pyridylalanine,L-3-pyridylalanine, or L-4-pyridylalanine; and L* is I, V, A, L, G, Tle,L-norvaline, L-norleucine, L-dehydroleucine, L-abu (2-aminobutyricacid), L-tert-leucine, beta-cyclohexyl-L-alanine, L-homoleucine, orL-homo-cyclohexylalanine.

In a further embodiment, a purified peptide can include the amino acidsequence X1-X2-X3-C-X4-X5-D-X6-X7-X8-W-X9-C-X10-X11-X12 (SEQ ID NO:827), wherein X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, and X12 areany amino acid; and wherein said peptide has a length of 16 to 50 aminoacids, such as 16 to 40 amino acids, 16 to 30 amino acids, 16 to 20amino acids, and 16 to 17 amino acids. In some cases, X1 is selectedfrom any amino acid in L form; X2 is selected from W and W*; X3 isselected from T, A, or W; X4 is selected from S, Y, A, V, and Y*; X5 isselected from G or D*; X6 is selected from E, A, and H; X7 is selectedfrom Y, L, or Y*; X8 is selected from T, Y, A, and S; X9 is selectedfrom H, S, and Y; X10 is selected from N and A; X11 is selected from Yand Y*; X12 is selected from any amino acid in L form; wherein W* is1-Nal, 2-Nal, Bpa, thien-W, W(5-OH), 7-aza-Trp, 1-methyl-Tip,5-bromo-Tryp, 5-chloro-Tryp, 5-fluor-Trp, 7-methyl-trp, 6-methyl-Tip,6-fluoro-Trp, or 6-hydroxy-trp; Y* is F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe2), F(3-OMe),F(4-CF3), F(4-CN), F(4-NO2), F(4-F), F(4-NO2), Hfe, 4-tBu-F, 4-CO2H-F,h-Tyr, h-Tyr(Me), Y(2,6-Me2), Y(3-Cl), Y(3-I), Y(Bn, 3-Cl),2-substituted L-Tyr, 2,3-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,3,5-substituted-L-tyr,2,5-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,6-substituted-L-Tyr, 2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Tyr,3-substituted-L-Tyr, 3,5-substituted-L-Tyr, 2-substituted L-Phe,2,3-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5-substituted-L-Phe, 2,5-substituted-L-Phe,2,6-substituted-L-Phe, 2,3,5,6-substituted-L-Phe, 3-substituted-L-Phe,3,5-substituted-L-Phe, L-2-pyridylalanine, L-3-pyridylalanine, orL-4-pyridylalanine; and D* is any amino acid in D form.

Any of the peptides described herein can be capable of forming adisulfide bond under non-reducing conditions, as known to those havingordinary skill in the art. In certain cases, any of the peptidesdescribed herein include a disulfide bond, and form a cyclized peptidestructure. Any of the peptides can exhibit specific binding affinity forcollagen, e.g., collagen type I from human or rat.

Specific peptides and peptide linker combinations are also set forth inTables 1-16, 18-41, 44, and 45 and in the Examples, below.

Diagnostic Compositions

Diagnostic compositions (e.g., diagnostic compositions suitable for MRimaging, nuclear imaging, PET imaging, SPECT imaging, or opticalimaging), which can be used for detecting pathologies where abnormal orexcessive proliferation of collagen is implicated, are described herein.Typically such diagnostic compositions will include one or more imagingmoieties (IEMs) coupled, such as through a linker (L), to anExtracellular Matrix Targeting Group (EMTG).

Extracellular Matrix Targeting Group

Generally, the Extracellular Matrix Targeting Group (EMTG) has anaffinity for an extracellular matrix component, such as collagen. Forexample, the EMTG can bind the extracellular matrix component with adissociation constant of less than 100 μM (e.g., less than 50 μM, lessthan 10 μM, less than 5 μM, less than 1 μM, or less than 100 nM). Insome embodiments, the EMTG has a specific binding affinity for anextracellular matrix component relative to serum proteins, such as humanserum albumin (HSA) and fibrinogen, to result in decreased backgroundsignal (e.g., background signal of blood). In these embodiments, theEMTG may exhibit a smaller dissociation constant for an extracellularmatrix component relative to the dissociation constant for a serumprotein.

Extracellular matrix components of the myocardium include soluble andinsoluble proteins, polysaccharides, including heteropolysaccharides andpolysaccharides covalently bound to proteins, and cell-surfacereceptors. For example, extracellular matrix components can be collagens(Types I, II, III, IV, V, and VI), elastin, decorin,glycosoaminoglycans, and proteoglycans.

Collagens are particularly useful extracellular matrix components totarget. For example, collagens I and III are the most abundantcomponents of the extracellular matrix of myocardial tissue,representing over 90% of total myocardial collagen and about 5% of drymyocardial weight. The ratio of collagen I to collagen III in themyocardium is approximately 2:1, and their total concentration isapproximately 100 μM in the extracellular matrix. Human collagen type Iis a trimer of two chains with an [α1(I)]₂[α2(I)] stoichiometrycharacterized by a repeating G-X-Y sequence motif, where X is mostfrequently proline and Y is frequently hydroxyproline. Thus, in someembodiments, human, pig, rabbit, mouse, and/or rat collagen type I istargeted.

Another extracellular matrix component suitable for targeting iselastin. The aorta and major blood vessels are 30% by dry weightelastin. Similarly, proteoglycans are also suitable for targeting,including proteoglycans present in the heart and blood vessels. Forexample, in non-human primates, proteoglycan distribution in themyocardium is approximately 62% heparan sulfates; 20% hyaluronin, and16% chondroitan/dermatan sulfates. The choindroitan/dermatan sulfatefraction consists exclusively of biglycan and decorin.

In principal, the EMTG can be any compound that exhibits affinity for acomponent of the extracellular matrix, e.g., an extracellular matrixcomponent of the myocardium, and can include small organic molecules,such as azo dyes or fluorophores, and peptides. Peptides can beparticularly useful, both as EMTGs in diagnostic compositions as well ascompositions, e.g., for therapeutic and/or diagnostic purposes. Apeptide can also be a point of attachment for one or more chelates atone or both peptide termini, or at one or more side chains, optionallythrough the use of linkers. In some embodiments, a peptide can onedescribed herein. Examples of such peptides are also set forth in theExamples, below.

Imaging Moieties

Diagnostic compositions can be prepared that incorporate any of theEMTGs described previously, including in particular the collagen bindingpeptides described above. Diagnostic compositions described hereintypically include one or more physiologically compatible chelatinggroups (C) as Imaging Moieties, Extracellular Matrix Targeting Groups(EMTG), and optional linkers (L). The diagnostic compositions thustarget an extracellular matrix component (“the target”), e.g., such ascollagen present in the extracellular matrix of the myocardium, and bindto it, allowing imaging of collagen and/or the myocardium. In somecases, a diagnostic compositions will include one or more collagenbinding peptides as the EMTG, one or more physiologically compatiblemetal chelating groups (C), and optionally one or more linkers (L)connecting the two (or more) moieties.

The C can be any of the many known in the art, and includes, forexample, cyclic and acyclic organic chelating agents such as DTPA, DOTA,HP-DO3A, DOTAGA, NOTA, Glu-DTPA, and DTPA-BMA. For MRI, metal chelatessuch as gadolinium diethylenetriaminepentaacetate (DTPA.Gd), gadoliniumtetraamine 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-N,N′,N″,N′″-tetraacetate(DOTA.Gd), gadolinium 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7-triacetate(DO3A.Gd), and bb(CO)DTPA.Gd are particularly useful. In certainembodiments, DOTAGA may be used. The structure of DOTAGA, showncomplexed with Gd(III), is as follows:

In other cases, the C can be GluDTPA, which has the following structure(shown complexed with Gd(III):

For MR applications, the C can be complexed to a paramagnetic metal ion,including Gd(III), Fe(III), Mn(II), Mn(III), Cr(III), Cu(II), Dy(III),Ho(III), Er(III), Pr(III), Eu(II), Eu(III), Tb(III), Tb(IV), Tm(III),and Yb(III). Additional information regarding C groups and syntheticmethodologies for incorporating them into diagnostic compositions can befound in WO 01/09188, WO 01/08712, and U.S. patent application Ser. No.10/209,183, entitled “Peptide-Based Multimeric Targeted ContrastAgents,” filed Jul. 30, 2002.

For radionuclide imaging agents, radionuclides ⁹⁰Y, ^(99m)Tc, ¹¹¹In,⁴⁷Sc, ⁶⁷Ga, ⁵¹Cr, ^(177m)Sn, ⁶⁷Cu, ¹⁶⁷Tm, ⁹⁷Ru, ¹⁸⁸Re, ¹⁷⁷Lu, ¹⁹⁹Au,²⁰³Pb, and ¹⁴¹Ce are particularly useful, and can be complexed to theC's described previously.

Metal complexes with useful optical properties also have been described.See, Murru et al., J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Comm. 1993, 1116-1118. Foroptical imaging using chelates, lanthanide chelates such as La(III),Ce(III), Pr(III), Nd(III), Pn(III), Sm(III), Eu(III), Gd(III), Tb(III),Dy(III), Ho(III), Er(III), Tm (III), Yb(III) and Ln(III) are suitable.Eu(III) and Tb(III) are particularly useful.

Metal chelates should not dissociate metal to any significant degreeduring the imaging agent's passage through the body, including whilebound to a target tissue.

Linkers

In some embodiments, a peptide and one or more Cs are covalently boundthrough a linker (L). A linker can be on the C-terminus, the N-terminus,or both, of a peptide. Additionally, a linker can be bound to the sidechain of a peptide. If a peptide is bound to multiple Ls, each L can bedifferent. A L can be covalently linked to a side chain of an aminoacid, e.g., lysine, glutamine, cysteine, methionine, glutamate,aspartate, asparagine.

In some embodiments an amino acid side chain can serve as the linker.For example the epsilon amino group (ε-NH₂) can be used to conjugate toa chelate for instance through an amide or thiourea linkage. Similarlythe delta amino group of ornithine (orn), the gamma amino group ofdiaminobutyric acid (dab), or the beta amino group of diamino proprionicacid (dpr) can also act linkers. These amino acids may be at the C- orN-terminus of the peptide or they may be positioned within the peptidesequence.

An L can include, for example, a linear, branched or cyclic peptidesequence. For example, and L can be a peptide sequence having from 1 to20, e.g., 1 to 10, or 2 to 5, prolines. Similarly, a L can be a peptidesequence having from 1 to 20, e.g., 1 to 10, or 2 to 5, glycines,Specific examples of L are a single G; the linear dipeptide sequence G-G(glycine-glycine); a single P (proline); the linear dipeptide sequenceP-P (proline-proline); —NH(CH₂)₂O(CH₂)₂NH₂ (referred to as PEG-H herein,and typically on the C-terminal end of a peptide), andNH₂(CH₂)₂O(CH₂)₂O(CH₂)C(O)— (referred to as PEG2O and typically on theN-terminal end). In some cases, the L can cap the N-terminus of thepeptide, the C-terminus, or both N- and C-termini, as an amide moiety.Other exemplary L capping moieties include sulfonamides, ureas,thioureas and carbamates. Ls can also include linear, branched, orcyclic alkanes, alkenes, or alkynes, and phosphodiester moieties. The Lmay be substituted with one or more functional groups, including ketone,ester, amide, ether, carbonate, sulfonamide, thiourea, or carbamatefunctionalities. Specific Ls contemplated also include—NH(CH₂)₂O(CH₂)₂)NH—, —NH—CO—NH—; and —CO—(CH₂)_(n)—NH—, where n=1 to10; diaminopropionic acid (dpr); diaminobenzidine (dab); —NH-Ph-;—NH—(CH₂)_(n)—, where n=1 to 10; —CO—NH—; —(CH₂)_(n)—NH—, where n=1 to10; —CO—(CH₂)_(n)—NH—, where n=1 to 10; and —CS—NH—. Additional examplesof Ls and synthetic methodologies for incorporating them into diagnosticcompositions, particularly diagnostic compositions comprising peptides,are set forth in WO 01/09188, WO 01/08712, and U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 10/209,183, entitled “Peptide-Based Multimeric TargetedContrast Agents,” filed Jul. 30, 2002.

In some embodiments, the linker can have the following structure:

Structures of MR Diagnostic Compositions

An MR diagnostic composition (also referred to as an MR chelate ordiagnostic composition) may have the following general formula:

[EMTG]_(n)-[L]_(m)-[C]_(p),

where n can range from 1 to 10, m can range from 0 to 10, and p canrange from 1 to 20, and the EMTG, L, and C moieties are as describedabove. In some embodiments, the EMTG is a collagen binding peptide, asdescribed previously.

In other embodiments, an MR diagnostic composition can have thefollowing general formula:

wherein n, m, p, EMTG, L and C are as defined above.

Examples of MR diagnostic compositions having such structures are setforth in the Examples, below, e.g., Table 17.

An MR diagnostic composition can also have the following generalformula:

[C]_(p)-[L]_(m)-[EMTG]_(n)-[L]_(q)-[C]_(r)

where p and r can independently range from 1 to 20; m and q canindependently be 0 or 1; and n can range from 1 to 10. For example, adiagnostic composition corresponding to such a generic structure isdepicted in Example 2, below.

Table 17, 42, and 43, below, sets forth MR diagnostic compositionshaving affinity for collagen, e.g., dried human and/or rat collagen.

In certain embodiments, an MR diagnostic composition can also have thefollowing general formula:

[C]_(p)-[L]_(m)-[EMTG]_(n)-{[L]_(s)-[C]_(x)}_(y)-[EMTG]_(z)-[L]_(q)-[C]_(r)

where p, x, and r can independently range from 1 to 20; m, s, and q canindependently be 0 or 1; y can range from 1 to 10, and n and z canindependently range from 1 to 10. The structure of other MR diagnosticcompositions are set forth in the accompanying claims.

Multimeric Structures

MR diagnostic compositions can also exhibit multimeric structures ofEMTGs, Cs, and Ls. For example, specifically contemplated herein arediagnostic composition structures as shown in U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 10/209,183, entitled PEPTIDE-BASED MULTIMERIC TARGETED CONTRASTAGENTS, filed Jul. 30, 2002, wherein a collagen binding peptide wouldsubstitute for the fibrin binding peptides disclosed therein.

Properties of Diagnostic Compositions

Certain diagnostic compositions can be more stable with respect todegradation by endogenous enzymes than the parent peptide (i.e., acollagen binding peptide without any attached chelates). To estimate invivo stability, test compounds can be incubated with rat liverhomogenates. After selected intervals, the reactions can be quenched andcentrifuged, and the supernatant can be analyzed by liquidchromatography-mass spectrometry to quantitate the amount of compoundremaining. Alternately, plasma samples can be analyzed for metabolitesafter administration of the test compound.

Diagnostic compositions can also bind an extracellular matrix component,such as collagen. For example, at least 10% (e.g., at least 15%, 20%,25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 92%,94%, or 96%) of the diagnostic composition can be bound to the desiredcomponent at physiologically relevant concentrations of diagnosticcomposition and target. The extent of binding of a diagnosticcomposition to a target can be assessed by a variety of equilibriumbinding methods, e.g., ultrafiltration methods; equilibrium dialysis;affinity chromatography; or competitive binding inhibition ordisplacement of probe compounds. For example, the binding of adiagnostic composition to collagen can be assessed by monitoring theinhibition of von Willebrand Factor binding to collagen by thediagnostic composition.

In some cases, peptides can be evaluated for their ability to bind tocollagen using assays described herein or as indicated in thecross-referenced application, such as dried human collagen or dried ratcollagen assays. For example, in certain cases, a peptide can exhibit apercent binding to dried human collagen or dried rat collagen (seeassays described in the cross-referenced case) of greater than 10%,e.g., greater than 12%, greater than 15%, greater than 20%, greater than25%, greater than 30%, greater than 35%, greater than 40%, greater than45%, greater than 50%, greater than 55%, greater than 60%, greater than65%, greater than 70%, greater than 75%, greater than 80%, or greaterthan 85%. In some embodiments, a peptide can exhibit a percent bindingto dried human collagen in the range of from about 10% to about 50%, orfrom about 20% to about 60%, or from about 30% to about 60%, or fromabout 40% to about 90%.

Alternatively, the extraction of the diagnostic composition intomycocardial tissue using a perfused heart model can be assessed. See theExamples, below.

MR diagnostic compositions can exhibit high relaxivity as a result oftarget binding (e.g., to collagen), which can lead to better imageresolution. The increase in relaxivity upon binding is typically1.5-fold or more (e.g., at least a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or foldincrease in relaxivity). Targeted MR diagnostic compositions having 7-8fold, 9-10 fold, or even greater than 10 fold increases in relaxivityare particularly useful. Typically, relaxivity is measured using an NMRspectrometer. The preferred relaxivity of an MRI diagnostic compositionat 20 MHz and 37° C. is at least 8 mM⁻¹s⁻¹ per paramagnetic metal ion(e.g., at least 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 60 mM⁻¹s⁻¹ perparamagnetic metal ion). MR diagnostic compositions having a relaxivitygreater than 60 mM⁻¹s⁻¹ at 20 MHz and 37° C. are particularly useful.

As described herein, targeted MR diagnostic compositions can be taken upselectively by areas in the body having higher concentrations of anextracellular matrix component target (e.g., collagen) relative to otherareas. Selectivity of uptake of targeted agents can be determined bycomparing the uptake of the agent by myocardium as compared to theuptake by blood. The selectivity of targeted diagnostic compositionsalso can be demonstrated using MRI and observing enhancement ofmyocardial signal as compared to blood signal.

Use of Diagnostic Compositions

MR diagnostic compositions prepared according to the disclosure hereinmay be used in the same manner as conventional MRI diagnosticcompositions and are useful for imaging extracellular matrix componentsof the myocardium. Typically, the MR diagnostic composition isadministered to a patient (e.g., an animal, such as a human) and an MRimage of the patient is acquired. Generally, the clinician will acquirean image of an area having the extracellular matrix component that istargeted by the agent. For example, the clinician may acquire an imageof the heart, a joint, a bone, or an organ if the diagnostic compositiontargets collagen or locations of abnormal collagen accumulation in adisease state. The clinician may acquire one or more images at a timebefore, during, or after administration of the MR diagnosticcomposition.

Certain MR techniques and pulse sequences may be preferred in themethods of the present disclosure. Both 2-dimensional and 3-dimensionalT1-weighted acquisitions are desirable. For example spin-echo and fastspin echo sequences with short repetition times (TR), or gradientrecalled echo sequences with short TR. Inversion recovery sequences maybe particularly useful for highlighting T1 changes, as well as the useof an inversion prepulse combined with a T1-weighted sequence. Forcardiac imaging methods of cardiac gating, either prospective orretrospective methods, can be applied to freeze cardiac motion.Similarly artifacts from respiratory motion can be reduced usingbreath-hold methodologies or free-breathing navigator techniques. Insome instances it may be desirable to obtain additional contrast and theT1-weighted sequence can be combined with fat suppression, or blood flowsuppression, or by using a magnetization transfer prepulse. Similarly,those of skill in the art will recognize other suitable MR-based methodsfor detecting infarct, e.g., T2 weighted imaging, delayedhyperenhancement imaging following extracellular contrast agent, andmyocardial imaging.

In some embodiments, a contrast-enhancing imaging sequence thatpreferentially increases a contrast ratio of a magnetic resonance signalof the myocardium having a MR diagnostic composition bound theretorelative to the magnetic resonance signal of background or flowing bloodis used. These techniques include, but are not limited to, black bloodangiography sequences that seek to make blood dark, such as fast spinecho sequences; flow-spoiled gradient echo sequences; and out-of-volumesuppression techniques to suppress in-flowing blood. These methods alsoinclude flow independent techniques that enhance the difference incontrast due to the T1 difference between contrast-enhanced myocardiumand blood and tissue, such as inversion-recovery prepared orsaturation-recovery prepared sequences that will increase the contrastbetween the myocadium and background tissues. Methods of preparation forT2 techniques may also prove useful. Finally, preparations formagnetization transfer techniques may also improve contrast with MRdiagnostic compositions.

Methods may be used that involve the acquisition and/or comparison ofcontrast-enhanced and non-contrast images and/or the use of one or moreadditional MR diagnostic compositions. The additional MR diagnosticcompositions may also exhibit affinity for an extracellular matrixcomponent of the myocardium, as described herein. For example, a seriesof images may be obtained with an MR diagnostic composition that bindsto collagen, while another series of images may be obtained with an MRdiagnostic composition that binds to elastin. Alternatively, anadditional MR diagnostic composition may be used that is nonspecific orthat may exhibit an affinity for fibrin or HSA. For example, methods asset forth in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 09/778,585, entitledMAGNETIC RESONANCE ANGIOGRAPHY DATA, filed Feb. 7, 2001 and U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 10/209,416, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FORTARGETED MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING OF THE VASCULAR SYSTEM, filed Jul.30, 2002 may be used. Similarly, fibrin targeted agents are described inU.S. patent application Ser. No. 10/209,183, entitled PEPTIDE-BASEDMULTIMERIC TARGETED CONTRAST AGENTS, filed Jul. 30, 2002. Diagnosticcompositions for binding HSA are described in WO 96/23526.

In addition, MR diagnostic compositions are useful for monitoring andmeasuring myocardial perfusion. Certain methods, although not all,include the step of obtaining an MR image of the myocardial tissue of ananimal while the animal is in a pre-hyperemic state. As used herein, theterm “pre-hyperemic state” refers to a resting physiologic state of theanimal. In some methods, peak hyperemia can be induced in the animal,either before or after the step of obtaining a pre-hyperemic MR image.As used herein, the term “peak hyperemia” means the point approachingmaximum increased blood supply to an organ or blood vessel forphysiologic reasons. Peak hyperemia can be exercise-induced orpharmacologically-induced. Exercise-induced peak hyperemia can beachieved through what is commonly known as a “stress test,” and hasseveral clinically relevant endpoints, including excessive fatigue,dyspnea, moderate to severe angina, hypotension, diagnostic STdepression, or significant arrhythmia. If exercise is used to inducepeak hyperemia, the animal can exercise for at least one additionalminute before the administration of a diagnostic composition, asdescribed below. The cardiac effect of exercise-induced peak hyperemiacan also be simulated pharmacologically (e.g., by the intravenousadministration of a coronary vasodilator, such as Dipyridamole(Persantine™)) or adenosine.

After or during the induction of peak hyperemia, an effective amount ofan MR-diagnostic composition as described above can be administered tothe animal. An MR image of the animal's myocardial tissue after theinduction of peak hyperemia can then be acquired. Generally, theacquisition of the image begins at a time frame at least 2 times greaterthan that required for a first pass distribution of the MR diagnosticcomposition. In humans, with venous injection of an MR diagnosticcomposition, the bolus typically passes through the right heart afterapproximately 12 sec., and through the left heart after about another 12sec. Thus, from time of injection to the first pass of the MR diagnosticcomposition through the entire heart, approximately 24-30 seconds havepassed usually. The second pass of the MR diagnostic composition usuallyis seen approximately 45 sec. later. In some embodiments, the MR imageof the myocardial tissue of the animal after the induction of peakhyperemia may begin at a time frame at least 5, 10, or 30 times greaterthan that required for a first pass distribution of the MR diagnosticcomposition. Typically, the acquisition of the MR image of themyocardial tissue after the induction of peak hyperemia begins in a timeperiod from about 5 to about 60 minutes after the induction of peakhyperemia. For example, in some embodiments, peak hyperemia is inducedin the patient outside of an MR scanner, the MR diagnostic compositionis injected at or after peak hyperemia, and the patient is put insidethe MR scanner to acquire the MR image of the myocardium after peakhyperemia.

In certain embodiments, the MR images of the myocardium, whether at peakor pre-hyperemia, are T1-weighted images. In some embodiments,T2-weighted images of the myocardium in a pre-hyperemic state areobtained. A T2 weighted image of the myocardium at rest (pre-hyperemic)would give an enhancement of infarcted tissue.

In certain cases, the MR image of the myocardial tissue of the animal inthe pre-hyperemic state, if obtained, are compared with the MR image ofthe myocardial tissue after the induction of peak hyperemia in order toevaluate myocardial perfusion. Zones of abnormal, or low, perfusion willbe hypointense (less intense) compared to normal myocardium in the peakhyperemia image.

Certain methods employ a second MR diagnostic composition. In thesemethods, peak hyperemia can be induced in an animal and an effectiveamount of a first MR-based diagnostic composition, as described herein,is administered. An MR image of the animal's myocardial tissue after theinduction of peak hyperemia is acquired, as described previously. Aneffective amount of a second MR-based diagnostic composition can then beadministered. In some embodiments, the first and second MR-baseddiagnostic compositions are administered together. The second MRdiagnostic composition may be any MR-based diagnostic compositionincluding ECF agents or the diagnostic compositions described herein.Suitable examples of Gd(III)-complexed MR diagnostic compositionsinclude Gd(III)-DTPA, Gd(III)-DOTA; Gd(III)-HP-DO3A, Gd(III)-DTPA-BMA,Gd(III)-DTPA-BMEA, Gd(III)-BOPTA, Gd(III)-EOB-DTPA, Gd(III)-MS-325,Gd(III)-Gadomer-17, or the Gd(III)-complex of the first MR diagnosticcomposition administered in the method. Other examples of usefuldiagnostic compositions are described in WO 96/23526. The administrationof the second MR diagnostic composition can occur after a time framesufficient to return the animal to a pre-hyperemic state. For example,the animal may immediately return to a pre-hyperemic state, or theadministration of the second diagnostic composition can occur on a timeframe typically ranging from 15 min. to approximately 4 hours after theinduction of peak hyperemia. An MR image of the myocardial tissue of theanimal in the pre-hyperemic state is then acquired. As one of skill inthe art can recognize, the order of the above-referenced steps can bealtered, e.g., the administration of the “second” MR diagnosticcomposition and acquisition of the pre-hyperemic image can be performedfirst, while the administration of the “first” MR diagnostic compositionand peak hyperemic scan could be acquired second.

An MR image of the myocardial tissue of the animal in the pre-hyperemicstate can be compared with the MR image of the myocardial tissue afterthe induction of peak hyperemia. Zones of abnormal, or low, perfusionwill be hypointense compared to normal myocardium in the peak hyperemiaimage. Both ischemic and infarct zones appear as hypointense in the peakhyperemia image. In the pre-hyperemic image acquired with the seconddiagnostic composition, however, the ischemic zones appear with normalto hyper-intensity, while infarct zones initially appear as hypointense(e.g., after a short time period after injection of the seconddiagnostic composition) and then as hyperintense after a longer delayafter injection. A comparison of the two images thus allows thecharacterization of abnormal, or low, perfusion as either ischemia orinfarct.

In other methods of evaluating myocardial perfusion, peak hyperemia isinduced and an MR diagnostic composition is administered. An MR image ofthe animal's myocardial tissue after the induction of peak hyperemia isacquired. The animal is allowed to return to a pre-hyperemic state, andthe myocardial tissue is imaged again. The two images can then becompared and examined for zones of ischemia and/or infarct.

Administering an MR diagnostic composition as described herein (e.g., acollagen targeted agent) at peak hyperemia should yield an MR imagewhere healthy tissue is bright, while inducibly ischemic and infarctedtissue is dark, for T1 weighted scans. If there is a dark (hypointenseregion), one can distinguish whether it is viable tissue (inducibleischemia) or if it is an infarct by comparing the image to an image ofthe myocardium obtained using one or more of several other methods. Forexample, one method would be to acquire a T2-weighted scan of themyocardium at rest (e.g., either before or after the induction of peakhyperemia). Infarct appears bright relative to normal diagnosticcomposition as described herein (e.g., a collagen targeted MR agent) atrest (pre-hyperemia) and to obtain a pre-hyperemic MR scan of themyocardium, as described previously above; this administration could beperformed either before or after the peak hyperemia MR scan. In such apre-hyperemic scan, normal and inducibly ischemic tissue would enhance,but infarct would not (analogously to nuclear medicine protocols). Athird approach would be to administer an extracellular fluid MRdiagnostic composition (ECF), e.g., GdDTPA or GdDOTA, or others as knownto those having ordinary skill in the art, at pre-hyperemia, and toobtain an MR image of the myocardium from about 2 to about 60 (e.g., 2to 20, 2 to 10, 5 to 10, 5 to 20, 10 to 30, 5 to 40, or 8 to 50) minutesafter administration of the ECF, e.g., a delayed enhancement image. Inthis case the infarct would enhance, but the ischemic area would not.Finally, a fourth approach would be to administer an ECF agent atpre-hyperemia and to perform a first pass (MRFP) dynamic perfusion examto determine if hypointense areas as seen in the targeted MR agenthyperemia scans enhance as quickly and intensely as normal myocardium,which would indicate inducible ischemia.

MRI diagnostic compositions containing small organic molecules as IEMsmay also be useful as optical diagnostic compositions. Due to thedifference in sensitivity between optical and MR techniques, such dualMR/optical diagnostic compositions can be used, for example, to imageareas of both high and low concentration of the myocardial extracellularmatrix component. Alternatively, a dual agent may be useful to imageareas where there is reduced resolution or signal due to an aspect ofthe alternative imaging modality.

Small organic molecules included in the compositions typically have anoptical signal. The optical signal can be any signal that can bedetected, including transmission or absorption of a particularwavelength of light (e.g., near-infrared), fluorescence orphosphorescence absorption and emission, reflection, changes inabsorption amplitude or maxima, and elastically scattered radiation.Generally, the optical signal is a near-infrared or fluorescenceemission spectrum. Methods of detection include catheters equipped withan appropriate optical detector.

The diagnostic compositions of the present disclosure may function todistinguish benign from malignant breast lesions or tumors. Thecompositions may be small enough to freely extravasate from the bloodvessels and into the interstitial space of the lesion. This may allowenhancement of all lesions, akin to that of contrast agents usedclinically, such as GdDTPA. Benign lesions such as fibroadenomas andfibrocystic tissue contain significant concentrations of type Icollagen. Carcinomas are also collagen rich compared to normal breasttissue, but also contain high collagenase concentrations which serve todegrade collagen.

In certain embodiments, a diagnostic composition of the presentdisclosure (e.g., compound ID 800) may be used. In some embodiments, aT1-weighted imaging is performed after injection of the diagnosticcomposition, and a dynamic phase shows all lesions enhanced. Thediagnostic composition is retained in the collagen-rich benign lesions,but washes out of the carcinoma. An image is then acquired at a latertime point (e.g., 10 minutes or more post injection) and the benignlesion remains enhanced whereas the carcinoma is not enhanced at thislate time point.

In another embodiment, the dynamic contrast-enhanced magnetic resonanceimaging (DCE-MRI) approach is used with the diagnostic compositions(e.g., compound ID 800). Collagen binding alters the signal intensity vstime curve, especially at later time points where the wash-out from thebenign lesion is much slower than from the carcinoma.

It is also contemplated that the diagnostic compositions set forth inthis disclosure may be useful in the following applications:

1. Atherosclerosis, high risk/vulnerable plaque. It has becomeestablished that certain atherosclerotic lesions are at risk forrupture, thereby creating a thrombogenic surface. Plaque rupture leadsto thrombosis which can result in myocardial infarction or stroke. Theprecursor lesion of plaque rupture has been defined (Virmani et al, JInterv Cardiol. 2002, 15:439-46) as “thin-cap fibroatheroma” (TCFA).Morphologically, TCFAs have a necrotic core with an overlying thinfibrous cap (<65 mm) consisting of collagen type I, which is infiltratedby macrophages. These lesions are most frequent in the coronary tree ofpatients dying with acute myocardial infarction. In TCFAs, necrotic corelength is approximately 2-17 mm (mean 8 mm) and the underlyingcross-sectional luminal narrowing in over 75% of cases is <75% (<50%diameter stenosis). The area of the necrotic core in at least 75% ofcases is ≦3 mm². Clinical studies of TCFAs are limited as angiographyand intravascular ultrasound (IVUS) catheters cannot precisely identifythese lesions. Identification of these precursor lesions of plaquerupture is therefore a great unmet medical need.

Stable lesions, on the other hand, have a thick fibrous (collagenous)cap. The ability to identify and distinguish atherosclerotic plaquesbased on cap thickness would be of great value. A collagen type Itargeted imaging agent such as those described in this application,would bind to the fibrous cap in a collagen-dependent manner. Stableplaques would be seen by T1-weighted MRI as hyperenhanced regions in thelumen and vessel wall. Unstable or at risk plaques (the TCFA) would beseen as a thin hyperenhanced complex zone appearing along the vesselwall.

2. Myocardial infarct imaging and myocardial viability. It has beendemonstrated that delayed enhancement of infarcted myocardium withGdDTPA enhanced MRI is useful for detecting both transmural andsubendocardial infarcts (e.g. Wagner et al. Lancet 2003, 361:374-9).Myocardial infarcts (MI) are typically classified by their EKG responseand are grouped into Q-wave MI and non-Q-wave MI. Non-Q-wave infarctsare typically smaller infarcts, however they are associated with amorbidity and mortality associated with larger infarcts. Wagner et al.showed that delayed contrast enhancement MRI was much better atdetecting subendocardial infarcts than single photon emission computedtomography (SPECT). Improving the detection of infarct to identifysmaller MI would result in a change in treatment for these patientswhose MI would otherwise have been missed and would likely improveprognosis. MI results in cardiac remodeling and an increased collagencontent. A specific collagen targeted contrast agent would be able tobetter delineate infarcted regions and improve specificity for infarct.

3. Renal fibrosis—diagnosis, and monitoring response to therapy. Renalfibrosis is a final common process of many chronic renal diseases. It ischaracterized by overdeposition of the extracellular matrix, notablcollagen, which eventually leads to the end-stage renal disease (ESRD).Several renal disorders such as diabetic nephropathy, chronicglomerulonephritis, tubulointerstitial fibrosis and hypertensivenephrosclerosis can result into ESRD. Early detection of renal fibrosiswould be valuable in order to start treatments earlier and improve thelikelihood of reversing the disease. Moreover an imaging agent thatallows monitoring of fibrosis would be valuable in assessing response totherapy.

4. Pulmonary fibrosis—diagnosis, and monitoring response to therapy.Pulmonary fibrosis is a pathology whereby the lung tissue becomesscarred with deposits of fibrotic (collagen) tissue. As fibrosisincreases there is a decrease in the lung's ability to transfer oxygento the blood resulting in considerable morbidity and a high likelihoodof mortality. There are many causes of pulmonary fibrosis: environmentalpollutants/toxins such as cigarette smoke, asbestos; diseases such asscleroderma, sarcoidosis, lupus, rheumatoid arthritis; side effects ofradiation treatment or chemotherapy (e.g. bleomycin treatment) forcancer. Early detection and accurate characterization of pulmonaryfibrosis can improve patient outcomes. Moreover, as new antifibrotictherapies become available there is a need for means of non-invasivelymonitoring pulmonary fibrosis and the patient's response to therapy.

5. Liver fibrosis—diagnosis, and monitoring response to therapy. Liverfibrosis is a common result of many diseases which attack the liver:hepatitis B and C; non-alcoholic steato hepatitis (NASH); cirrhosis; andoccurs in a fraction of patients with fatty liver. Fibrosis in the livercan be diagnosed but only at an advanced stage with current non-invasiveprocedures. Biopsy can detect fibrosis at an earlier stage but liverbiopsy is not well suited to screening/monitoring disease because of itscost, associated morbidity and known lack of accuracy because ofsampling variation, Rockey D C, Bissell D M. “Noninvasive measures ofliver fibrosis” Hepatology. 2006 43:S113-20. Early detection andaccurate characterization of liver fibrosis can improve patientoutcomes. For patients with NASH, diet changes can reverse the diseaseif caught early enough. Moreover, as new antifibrotic therapies becomeavailable there is a need for means of non-invasively monitoringpulmonary fibrosis and the patient's response to therapy.

Therapeutic Compositions

Peptides described herein can be included in compositions for treating,ameliorating, preventing, or prophylaxis of pathologies or disordersassociated with abnormal or excessive accumulation of collagen or fortreating, ameliorating, preventing, or prophylaxis of pathologies ordisorders associated with collagen vascular or tissue diseases. Forexample, a therapeutic composition can include a peptide as shown hereinconjugated to a therapeutic agent, such as collagenase, a collagenaseactivator, an anti-inflammatory, or an antithrombotic (e.g., a plateletgpIIb/IIIa inhibitor, a Factor Xa inhibitor, and a thrombin inhibitor).In cases where a collagenase or collagenase activator is conjugated, thetherapeutic composition can be useful to alter (e.g., increase orimprove) the myocardial remodeling process after a myocardialinfarction. Antifibrotics can include inhibitors of transforming growthfactor beta-1 (TGF β1), angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors(e.g. captopril), endothelin A receptor antagonists (e.g. LU 135252, ChoJ J, Hocher B, Herbst H, Jia J D, Ruehl M, Hahn E G, Riecken E O,Schuppan D. “An oral endothelin-A receptor antagonist blocks collagensynthesis and deposition in advanced rat liver fibrosis”,Gastroenterology. 2000 118:1169-78), antioxidants, PPAR-γ agonists, andintegrin antagonists to inhibit activation of TGF-β (e.g. EMD409849, ananti α_(v)β₆ antagonist, Goodman S L, Holzemann G, Sulyok G A, KesslerH., Nanomolar small molecule inhibitors for alphav(beta)₆,alphav(beta)₅, and alphav(beta)₃ integrins” J Med. Chem. 200245:1045-51).

Peptides can be linked or fused to a therapeutic agent in known ways,using the linkers discussed below with respect to constructingdiagnostic compositions. Conjugation to a therapeutic agent can beachieved by standard chemical techniques including the formation ofamide, ester, disulfide, thiourea, and thioether bonds. For example, apeptide can be covalently linked, either directly or through a linker,to a protein by forming an amide bond between the peptide or the linkerand the lysine residues on the surface of the protein. Surface lysineresidues are usually distant from enzymatic catalytic sites. Therefore,a tethered moiety is less likely to interfere with the enzyme'scatalytic activity. In particular, a coupling agent or an activatedester can be used to achieve amide bond formation between a lysine on aprotein therapeutic agent and the peptide. Multiple ligation can beachieved in a single step. The ratio of the peptide to the therapeuticagent can be controlled by adjusting the stoichiometry of the ligationchemistry. Multiple ligation is particularly useful in the case of amoderately strongly binding peptide because higher binding affinity canbe realized through the so called “avidity” effect. Alternatively, apeptide can be incorporated into the hybrid molecule using recombinantDNA technology.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

Pharmaceutical compositions can include any of the diagnostic ortherapeutic compositions described previously, and can be formulated asa pharmaceutical composition in accordance with routine procedures. Asused herein, pharmaceutical compositions can include pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts or derivatives thereof. “Pharmaceutically acceptable”means that the agent can be administered to an animal withoutunacceptable adverse effects. A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt orderivative” means any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, salt ofan ester, or other derivative of composition that, upon administrationto a recipient, is capable of providing (directly or indirectly) acomposition of the present disclosure or an active metabolite or residuethereof. Other derivatives are those that increase the bioavailabilitywhen administered to a mammal (e.g., by allowing an orally administeredcompound to be more readily absorbed into the blood) or which enhancedelivery of the parent compound to a biological compartment (e.g., thebrain or lymphatic system) thereby increasing the exposure relative tothe parent species. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the therapeuticor diagnostic compositions or compositions of this disclosure includecounter ions derived from pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic andorganic acids and bases known in the art, e.g., sodium, calcium,N-methylglutamine, lithium, magnesium, potassium, etc.

Pharmaceutical compositions can be administered by any route, includingboth oral, intranasal, inhalation, or parenteral administration.Parenteral administration includes, but is not limited to, subcutaneous,intravenous, intraarterial, interstitial, intrathecal, and intracavityadministration. When administration is intravenous, pharmaceuticalcompositions may be given as a bolus, as two or more doses separated intime, or as a constant or non-linear flow infusion. Thus, compositionscan be formulated for any route of administration.

Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions insterile isotonic aqueous buffer. Where necessary, the composition mayalso include a solubilizing agent, a stabilizing agent, and a localanesthetic such as lidocaine to ease pain at the site of the injection.Generally, the ingredients will be supplied either separately, e.g. in akit, or mixed together in a unit dosage form, for example, as a drylyophilized powder or water free concentrate. The composition may bestored in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampule or sachetteindicating the quantity of active agent in activity units. Where thecomposition is administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with aninfusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade “water forinjection,” saline, or other suitable intravenous fluids. Where thecomposition is to be administered by injection, an ampule of sterilewater for injection or saline may be provided so that the ingredientsmay be mixed prior to administration. Pharmaceutical compositionscomprise the therapeutic or diagnostic compositions of the presentdisclosure and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, with anypharmaceutically acceptable ingredient, excipient, carrier, adjuvant orvehicle.

A pharmaceutical composition is preferably administered to the patientin the form of an injectable composition. The method of administering atherapeutic or diagnostic composition is preferably parenterally,meaning intravenously, intra-arterially, intrathecally, interstitiallyor intracavitarilly. Pharmaceutical compositions can be administered tomammals including humans in a manner similar to other diagnostic ortherapeutic agents. The dosage to be administered, and the mode ofadministration will depend on a variety of factors including age,weight, sex, condition of the patient and genetic factors, and willultimately be decided by medical personnel subsequent to experimentaldeterminations of varying dosage followed by imaging as describedherein. In general, dosage required for diagnostic sensitivity ortherapeutic efficacy will range from about 0.001 to 50,000 μg/kg,preferably between 0.01 to 25.0 μg/kg of host body mass. The optimaldose will be determined empirically following the disclosure herein.

EXAMPLES 1. Phage Display Identification of Peptides that Bind toCollagen

A. Selection Strategies

Collagen I selections were conducted using cyclic peptide sub-librariesas well as a linear library (Ln20) (Dyax, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.) in thefollowing panning formats:

-   -   1. Biotinylated collagen I on streptavidin (SV) beads selection    -   2. Biotinylated collagen I immobilized on SV beads with human        serum in selection    -   3. Collagen I (non-biotinylated) immobilized on immunotubes    -   4. Collagen I (non-biotinylated) immobilized on immunotubes with        human serum in selection    -   5. Collagen I (non-biotinylated) immobilized on carboxylic acid        (CA) beads

Since cross reactivity with human serum albumin (HSA) was not desired,phage aliquots were depleted against HSA (bound to SV beads) beforeselecting on collagen I. For each of the selections above, three roundswere performed. Selections 1 and 2 above consisted of 2 arms each, wherebinding time for phage and targets was varied between either 5- or60-minutes. All other selections were performed using 60-minutes bindingtime. Based on pre-screening ELISA on round 2 and round 3 selectionoutputs, a specific set of selection arms was chosen for high throughputscreening. ELISA positive isolates were re-arrayed and sequenced. Uniquesequences were re-arrayed, and secondary ELISA with collagen fromdifferent species (bovine, rabbit, rat, pig) was performed. Sequencemotif analysis was performed on unique sequences.

Target Validation:

Biotinylated collagen and non-biotinylated collagen were analyzed toconfirm that target was effectively immobilized prior to phageselection. The analyses included: a.) SDS PAGE verification of SV beadspull-down experiment for biotinylated collagen, b.) ELISA on CA beadscoated with non-biotinylated collagen (using anti-collagen antibody),and c.) Immunotubes ELISA after coating tubes with non-biotinylatedcollagen (using anti-collagen antibody).

Results Summary:

From selection and screening using collagen, the cyclic and linearpeptide libraries produced over 200 total unique peptide sequences fromall selection modes, none of which cross-reacted in ELISA with HSA.Using sequence alignment and analysis, motifs were identified for thelibraries. Cross-species ELISA showed that many clones bound effectivelyto collagens from rat, rabbit, bovine and pig; and 15 isolates showedbinding to all 5 species. Many isolates (226) showed binding toh-Collagen but not HSA in the presence of serum.

ELISA Analyses:

To determine the relative binding affinity and binding specificity ofindividual phage clones to collagen, individual phage colonies obtainedafter the phage screen were hand-picked at random for amplification in96-well plates. The procedure for growing liquid cultures of phage wasas follows:

1. From an overnight culture of (E. coli) MRF′, dilute 1:100 inNZCYM/12.5 μg/mL tetracycline and grow to mid-log stage (OD 0.5, 600nm);2. Aliquot mid-log cells into 96-well microtiter plates (200 uL perwell)3. Pick plaques (by hand for pre-screening or with automated picker forhigh-throughput) into individual wells of microtiter plates from step 2above4. Seal plates using adhesive film seal and incubate with shaking at 37°C. overnight

Amplified phage in liquid culture were then tested for their ability tobind to collagen using a phage ELISA procedure. In this method,biotinylated human collagen was immobilized to the wells of a 96-wellmicrotiter plate coated with streptavidin. Phage were incubated eitherin the plate in either buffer (PBST) or in human serum. Unbound phagewere washed from the plate and the presence of bound phage was detectedby anti-M13 antibody coupled to horse radish peroxidase. Plates weredeveloped with the colorimetric substrates TMB/H₂O₂ and the absorbanceof the plate was measured at 630 nm. High absorbance values wereassociated with high-binding phage colonies. To determine thespecificity of the interaction, phage ELISAs were conducted to determinebinding to streptavidin alone or to human serum albumin. In both cases,the protein target was passively adsorbed to the plate in buffer (100 mMbicarbonate, pH 8.5 for streptavidin; PBS for HSA).

The protocol used was as follows:

-   -   1. Coat plates with Streptavidin (2 μg/mL in 100 mM bicarbonate,        pH 8.5, 100 uL per well) overnight at 4° C.    -   2. Next morning, block all plates with 1% (w/v) BSA in 100 mM        bicarbonate, pH 8.5, 2 hr at 37° C.    -   3. Wash 3×100 uL PBST (PBS with Triton X-100).    -   4. Add biotinylated-collagen at 1 μg/mL (100 μL per well); for        background plates use streptavidin and bio-HSA. Incubate 2 hr        RT.    -   5. Wash all plates 3×PBST.    -   6. Spin overnight cultures of amplified phage in 96-well plates        from step 4 in the previous section at 1200 rpm for 5 min.    -   7. Add 70 μL PBST and 30 μL amplified phage culture to each        well; incubate 1.5 hr at RT.    -   8. Wash plates 5×100 uL with PBST.    -   9. Add anti-M13 monoclonal antibody-HRP conjugate (1:5000        dilution in PBST, 100 μL/well). Incubate 1 hr RT    -   10. Wash plates 7×100 uL with PBST.    -   11. Develop with TMB/H₂O₂.    -   12. Read plates on plate reader at 630 nm.    -   13. For cross-species ELISA: the same procedure was used, wells        were coated with designated collagen (rabbit, bovine, rat or        pig) at 1 ug/mL in PBST (100 uL per well).    -   14. For ELISA with serum: same procedure is used but serum was        added at the same time phage was added; final concentration of        serum was 50% (v/v) per well.    -   15. For phage ELISA vs. Streptavidin or HSA, plates were        prepared following steps 1 and 2 above.

Approximately 211 peptide sequences were identified from the phagedisplay protocol by DNA sequencing of positive clones.

B. Peptide Sequences

Approximately 140 synthetic peptides were prepared using standardpeptide synthesis methods. The percent binding to dried human collagen(assay described below), for certain peptides are set forth below.

TABLE 1 TN-6 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID NO.Collagen Binding Sequence 1 56% Y H A C Y Q A G C W I W

TABLE 2 TN-8 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences 2 14% W G W C E W A Q N N C W N Y 3  2%P W W C H E M P S M C F G F

TABLE 3 TN-9 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences  4 45% T W M C V D P P L W R C W V Q  5 24%N W K C W G V V K W E C I W A  6 20% T W Q C S G N Q K W S C E W F  711% N W Y C T G T K S W E C F W K  8  9% G W Q C F G A S D W H C T W V 9  7% T W N C Y G V T E W H C Y M I 10  9%L T V C H P P Y Y G R C N F V 11  9% P L V C H P P Y S G S C S L H 12 7% P M I C H A P Y V G K C N F L

TABLE 4 TN-10 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences 13 78-85% Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 14 83%D W T C R G D E Y T W H C N Y E 15 83% D W T C Y G D E Y T W H C N Y E16 83% D W T C S G D E Y Y W H C N Y E 17 78%D W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 18 78% D W T C S G D E Y T W Y C N Y E19 70% D W T C S G D E Y R W H C N Y E 20 64%P W Y C S G D H L D W K C I Y Q 21 57% D W T C V G D H K T W K C N F H22 55% D W E C H G N E F E W N C L M R 23 44%A W D C S G N I P T W Y C R R L 24 43% E W L C V G D S L K W Y C K H S25 39% I W L C T G G A A T W N C K F D 26 25%  W R C D G D A H D W H C D W F 27 24% S W H C F G D N E N W M C N L R28 20% S W I C T G D N I D W N C R F A 29 16%D W I C H G D F D T W K C D L Q 30 16% G W D C Q G T D N I W E C V R K31 15% G W V C G G D H T T W E C H L Q 32 12%N W V C S G D H A D W S C A L I 33 12% A W T G V G G E K T W G G V W N34 11% M W D C T G N S A E W R C E M Q 35  8%Y W V C G G D H Q S W H C S H P 36  7% S W S C G G D H N A W K C Q Y S37  7% L W N C H G T D A N W K C V L N 38  6%G W S C H G D A A D W P C Q W S 39  6% G W Q C S G D A S V W N C D W I40  3% E W R C R G D S S S W L C D Y T 41  1%V W A C R G G T T N W H C D L 42 40% T W R C D Q F K G K W V C R G G 4330% P W Q C Y S D K T S W V C N L Y 44 28%G W N C Y E Y D S Q W I C D H L 45 25% E W Q C T Q Y A N Q W N C K Y N46 23% G W V C L Q K G P K W V C D W D 47 22%P W T C R M T E N T W V C D L N 48 22% A W S C W I V E G R W N C S D I49 19% A W F C S Q K N R L W S C G E T 50 18%K W F C E L M Q D Q W Q C G S K 51 18% K W F C E L M H D Q W Q C G S K52 15% R W S C W L D E N G W K C D G T 53 12%G W F C K L V D G N W E C S T K 54 12% M W N C T M T K S G W R C F E K55 12% S W N C H W R N Q G W L C S G G 56 11%S W N C H M I R N E W R C T G H 57 11% R W T C D L Q R G D W Q C S T I58 10% G W V C M M R E T D W N C S I 59 10%H W Q C R L T D Y G W N C D E R 60 10% E W H C V L N D F R W T C G G D61  9% K W S C Y M V D H Q W Y C R E F 62  9%H W S C Y L G D N G W N C H D R 63  8% N W Y C S Q A L D N W S C K L R64  8% T W I C S H N D K G W T C G D Q 65  7%K W E C V H T K G E W Y C E T K 66  6% R W S C V L D A D G W V C S D N67  5% G W S C H S M D M Q W H C D F S 68  5%S W H C F L E N H H W M C S D H 69  3% H W Q C G E K M S F W S C E L V70  3% F W R C A L L D G H W Q C T D H 71  3%S W H C A L M G S R W V C G Q N 72  1% E W H C V F I Q G D W L C N S G73  1% S W H C A L V E N S W Q C S E A 74 67-69%Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 75 10% E R N C V L N D F R W T C G G D76  1% F G A C D I F P T F H T C P G V

TABLE 5 TN-11 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences 77 12% G W Q C Q G T D S L D W K C L Y M 78  8%T W A C D L D E Y G G W Q C Y T G 79  8%F W T C E L D F R Q S W Y C Y D K 80  6%S W Y C N N G S Y G Q W H C E H R 81  3%Q W F C E M D E Y G K W N C G M M 82  3%L W T C S M D R N Y D W V C G E K 83  3%G W A C N T T S K G D W E C T N L 84  3%H W S C D L A M D N E W F C S T K 85  3%G W T C S Q P G A N V W N C T M Q 86  2%S W Y C D W D D R K G W M C G S D 87  1%H W T C D Q A K G G A W S C S S T 88  1%F W T C M R D Q V G E W H C G T E 89  1%K W H C E L D S H M E W S C S G H 90 34%T W A C G W T T T G W D N C R W I 91 28%T W A C G W T T A G W D N C R W I 92 34%T W A C G W T T T G W D N C R W I 93  5%W W A C Q K G Q H D W E K C H W L 94 21%W T D C Q W M D E Q L W T C R W D 95  5%W T D C Q W M D E Q I W T C R W D 96 17%W Q L C S S R N D H V A Y C F V S 97 13%W I S C E S S E E K I S Y C W R A 98  5%W Q V C A D S P G V I T Y C Y T Y 99  3%A K K C W Y N D G G H L R C R T L

TABLE 6 TN-12 Dried Collagen Binders, all peptides arecyclic with disulfide bond between the two cysteines: Dried SEQ Human IDCollagen NO. Binding Sequences 100 67%W W G C R Q G T G E H W S H C M W F 101 56%W W T C H M T W S G Q W D S C K W H 102 31%W A Y C M T D P S G K Y R Y C Q N W 103  2%Y P A C D D Q T H L W N L A C W P A

2. Synthesis of Peptides

Peptides described herein were synthesized using the generic protocoldescribed below.

Peptides are synthesized on an automated peptide synthesizer “Symphony”(Rainin Inc.) using 1 to 12 batch reactors loaded with 0.1 mmol ofcommercially available Rink amide resin (˜0.20 mmol/g). A doublecoupling cycle is used for each amino acid and a 5-fold excess of aminoacids is used per coupling to synthesize the peptide on the resin.Standard Fmoc chemistry is used to elongate the peptide on the resin.The Fmoc is removed with a solution of 20% piperidine in DMF. Each aminoacid dissolved in a 0.2 M solution of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole in(N-methylpyrrolidone) NMP is coupled to the peptide using a 0.2 Msolution of diisopropylcarbodiimide in NMP. After each deprotection orcoupling step the resin is washed alternatively three times with DMF andMeOH. The completed peptide/resin is washed with CH₂Cl₂ and dried undernitrogen.

After the synthesis of the peptide on the resin is complete, the peptideis cleaved from the resin using the following cleavage cocktail:TFA/TIS/H₂O 95:2.5:2.5 (5 mL per 100 mmoles of peptide). The solution offully deprotected peptide is then concentrated to a tenth of its initialvolume and the peptide is precipitated with cold ether (20 mL). Thepeptide solid is isolated after centrifugation and then re-dissolved ina 1:1 mixture of DMSO/H₂O (1 mL per 25 mg of peptide) and the pH isadjusted to 5 with a 1N NaOH solution. The cyclization is monitored byLC-MS (12 to 24 h). The cyclic peptide is purified by reverse phasepreparative HPLC on a C-18 column using a gradient of 1% TFA in water to1% TFA in acetonitrile. The fractions of pure peptide are pooled andlyophilized to give the final peptide moiety.

3. Screening of Phage-Display Identified Peptides

Peptides identified using the phage-display protocol were screened usingdried collagen assays (DCA) as described in A.-D. below.

A. Preparation of Human Collagen:

Acid soluble human collagen extracted from placenta (Sigma, cat#C7774,lot#083K375) is dissolved in 15 mM HCl (3.5 mg/ml) by vortexing andgently shaking for 3-4 hours at 4° C. The acid soluble collagen isdissolved against PBS, pH 7.4 (three buffer exchanges are used). TheNaH₂PO₄ protein concentration is determined by the BCA method (Pierce,Cat #23225) using bovine collagen (Vitrogen, cat #FXP-019) as areference standard. Percent gelation (fibril formation) of the collagenis determined by incubating 10 μM collagen (3.3 mg/ml) at 37° C. for 6hours. A typical percent gelation is 60%.

B. Preparation of Rat Collagen:

Rat collagen (acid soluble, type I, rat tail, Upstate USA, Inc,cat#08-115) is dialyzed against 10 mM Phosphate (NaH₂PO₄), pH 4.2 withthree changes of the dialysis buffer. For the final assay, a 1:10 volumeof 10×PBS (100 mM NaH₂PO₄, 1.5 M NaCl pH 7.4) is added to the collagensolution (final 1×PBS) and incubated at 37° C. for 2 hours. The gelationis typically 90%.

C. Preparation of microliter plate:

Collagen solutions are gelled and dried down in the wells of a 96 wellmicrotiter plate (non-binding polystyrene, VWR, cat#29445-142) orpolypropylene plate (Coaster, cat #29444-100, code 3364). 75 μl of 10 μMhuman collagen is aliquoted into each well and the plate is incubated at37° C. for 6 hours to form a gel. The collagen gels are evaporatedovernight to dryness at 37° C. Ungelled collagen is removed by washingthe collagen films with 200 μL PBS (four times, 15 min per wash). Thethin collagen fibril film remains, coating the bottom of each well. Thefinal well content of gelled collagen is 150 μg. After washing by PBSthe plate is again dried at 37° C. for 2 hours and is stored at −20° C.

D. Binding Assay:

600 μL of 5 μM peptide solution is prepared in PBS, pH 7.4. 90 μl of the5 μM peptide solution is added to two collagen containing wells, and inaddition, an empty well to control for nonspecific binding to the plate.An additional 90 μL is reserved in a HPLC glass vial as a measure of thetotal concentration. The plate is then incubated on a shaker table (300rpm) for 2 hours at room temperature to allow the compound to bind.After 2 hours the supernatant from each well (with or without collagen)is transferred to an HPLC glass vial. The relative amount of free,unbound compound in the sample supernatants and the amount of compoundin the reserved (total) sample are determined by HPLC (Agilent, 1100series). The compounds are chromatographed on a Kromasil C-4 column(AKZONOBEL, cat #E 22840), and eluted use a two buffer system (buffer A,1% TFA in distilled water, buffer B 1% TFA in Acetonitrile). Each sample(30 μl) is injected onto the column and the compound (peptide or othercompound) is eluted by a 10-40% gradient of buffer B (3 min, 5 ml/min).The peak area of the compound in each sample is determined byintegration using the ChemStation software. Values for the supernatantsamples ([Free]) after incubation with collagen and the total sample areaveraged. The percent bound, % B, is calculated from the formula: %B=([Total]−[Free])/[Total].

4. Modification of Peptides and Screening

Peptides identified in the phage display protocol were modified in orderto assess the effects of amino acid type and location on binding; theresults are shown below.

A. Various Amino Acid Substitutions

TABLE 7 TN-6 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ Binding IDDried Dried NO. Human Rat Sequences 104 12 19 Y H A C Y Q A G′ C W I W105  9 23 Y H A C Y Q A′ G C W I W 106  9 24 Y H A C Y Q A G C W I Y 107 9  6 Y H A C Y Q A G C Y I W 108  5 12 Y H A C Y Q A G C Y I Y 109 2137 Y S A C Y Q A G C W I W 110 10  2 Y S A C Y Q A G C Y I Y 111  0 24Y H A S Y Q A G S W I W Note that G′ and A′ are the N-methyl derivativesof G and A, respectively.

TABLE 8 TN-9 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences 112 9% A K A C S V H D E F G C L I S 113 3%F S E C V W V N A Y Q C E Y F

TABLE 9 TN-10 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ Binding IDDried Dried NO. Human Rat Sequences 114 19 14  W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 115 39 23D W T C S G D P Y T W H C N Y E 116 58 35D W T C S G D H L T W H C N Y G 117 38 24D W T C S G D H L T W K C N Y G 118 68 67D W T C S G N H L T W Y C N Y G 119 55 55D W T C S G D E F T W H C N Y E 120 38 28D W T C S G D E Y A W H C N Y e 121 57 72P W T C S G D E Y A W H C N Y e

TABLE 10 TN-10 Peptides with the Linker-G- at the Nterminus (G-peptide); all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ Binding IDDried Dried NO. Human Rat Sequences (L = G at N-terminus) 122 71 71Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 123 59 72 Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y 124 24 17 Q W T C S G D E Y a W H C N A e 125 85 86Q W T C S G D E Y S W H C N Y e 126 68 73Q W T C S G D E Y A W H C N Y e 127 80 73Q W T C S G D E Y T W S C N Y E 128 80 72Q W T C S G D A Y T W H C A Y E 129 87 84A W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E

TABLE 11 TN-11 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ Dried Human ID CollagenNO. Binding Sequences 130 32% W W A C Q K G R H D W E K C R W L

B. Alanine Scanning

Alanine scanning was used to also probe the effect of amino acidposition and type on binding. The results are shown below.

TABLE 12 TN-6 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ % Collagen Binding IDDried Dried No. Human Rat Sequences 131  7 12 A H A C Y Q A G C W I W132 53 37 Y A A C Y Q A G C W I W 133  4  5 Y H A C A Q A G C W I W 13414  1 H A C Y A A G C W I I W 135 72 88 Y H A C Y Q A A C W I W 136  2 2 Y H A C Y Q A G C A I W 137  4  7 Y H A C Y Q A G C W A W 138  2  1Y H A C Y Q A G C W I A

TABLE 13 TN-10 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ Binding IDDried Dried Sequences(all have a -G- NO. Human RatLinker at the N-terminus) 139  1  0 Q A T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 14084 77 Q W A C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 141 87 83Q W T C A G D E Y T W H C N Y E 142  9  6Q W T C S A D E Y T W H C N Y E 143 66 51Q W T C S G A E Y T W H C N Y E 144 87 77Q W T C S G D A Y T W H C N Y E 145 68 50Q W T C S G D E A T W H C N Y E 146 82 77Q W T C S G D E Y A W H C N Y E 147  5  1Q W T C S G D E Y T A H C N Y E 148 66 73Q W T C S G D E Y T W A C N Y E 149 82 82Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C A Y E 150 16  9Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N A E 151 87 81Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y A

C. D-Amino Acid Scanning

Peptides having D-amino acids at certain positions were also preparedand assayed for collagen binding. The results are shown below. Note thata lower-case letter indicates the D-form of the amino acid.

TABLE 14 TN-6 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic withdisulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ Binding IDDried Dried No. Human Rat Sequences 152 y H A C Y Q A G C W I W 153  0 0 Y h A C Y Q A G C W I W 154 24 21 Y H a C Y Q A G C W I W 155 15 11Y H A c Y Q A G C W I W 156 38 48 Y H A C y Q A G C W I W 157 37 35Y H A C Y q A G C W I W 158 56 66 Y H A C Y Q a G C W I W 159  7 27Y H A C Y Q A G c W I W 160 20 12 Y H A C Y Q A G C w I W 161  8 10Y H A C Y Q A G C W i W 162 18 14 Y H A C Y Q A G C W I w 163 37 53y h a c y q a G c w i w

TABLE 15 TN-10 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic with disulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen Binding SEQ IDDried Dried Sequences NO. Human Rat(all have a -G- Linker at the N-terminus) 164 46 31q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 165 2 4 Q w T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E166 2 3 Q W t C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 167 4 0Q W T c S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 168 3 2 Q W T C s G D E Y T W H C N Y E169 11 4 Q W T C S G d E Y T W H C N Y E 170 49 35Q W T C S G D e Y T W H C N Y E 171 13 6 Q W T C S G D E y T W H C N Y E172 9 8 Q W T C S G D E Y t W H C N Y E 173 5 4Q W T C S G D E Y T w H C N Y E 174 5 0 Q W T C S G D E Y T W h C N Y E175 2 2 Q W T C S G D E Y T W H c N Y E 176 2 2Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C n Y E 177 30 27Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N y E 178 90 87Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y e

TABLE 16 TN-10 Peptides, all peptides are cyclic with disulfide bond between the two cysteines: % Collagen SEQ   Binding IDDried Dried NO. Human  Rat Sequences 179 81% 75% D W T C S a D E Y T W H C N Y E 180 81% 72% D W T C S s D E Y T W H C N Y E 181 87% 86% D W T C S r D E Y T W H C N Y E 182 89% 86% D W T C S y D E Y T W H C N Y E 183 73% 63% D W T C S l D E Y T W H C N Y E

5. Iodination of SEQ ID NO: 144

SEQ ID NO: 144 was iodinated with radioactive 1-125 at GE Healthcare ateither tyrosine residue using the lactoperoxidase method of iodination.Two products were identified and purified by HPLC, presumablycorresponding to iodination at each tyrosine. The iodinated material wasmixed with SEQ ID NO: 144 to a concentration of 5 μM and analyzed usingthe dried collagen assay; the fraction that bound to collagen asdetermined using a radiotracer that was similar to the fraction boundfor SEQ ID NO: 144 without the radiotracer was used, as set forth below.

6. Biodistribution Analysis of SEQ ID NO: 144 as Compared to GdDTPA

Conscious male Sprague-Dawley rats ranging in weight from 270 to 320grams were administered a solution containing SEQ ID NO: 144 (0.5μmol/kg) with radiolabeled (1-125) SEQ ID NO: 144 (Example 5) (8-10μCi), GdDTPA (0.5 μmol/kg), and radiolabeled (Tc-99m) DTPA (8-10 μCi)via tail vein injection. At either one or five minutes post injectionthe animals were sacrificed and the blood and heart collected. The heartwas rinsed in a saline and blotted dry before analysis. The organs werethen weighed and the radioactivity measured with a Packard Cobra 5003Gamma Scintillation counter. The Tc-99m counts were measured in thewindow 128-165 keV; the 1-125 counts were measured in the window 15-75keV with a 5% correction for spillover from the technetium. An aliquotof the injection solution was also weighed and counted. Concentrationestimates were decay corrected. Studies were performed at least induplicate.

Results:

Time Heart Blood Compound N (min) (% ID/g) (% ID/g) Heart:Blood SEQ IDNO: 144 2 1 0.68 ± 0.01 1.8 ± 0.2 0.38 GdDTPA 2 1 0.32 ± 0.02 1.2 ± 0.20.26 SEQ ID NO: 144 3 5 0.50 ± 0.16 0.46 ± 0.07 1.08 GdDTPA 3 5 0.17 ±0.08 0.67 ± 0.12 0.26

Conclusion:

The collagen binding peptide (SEQ ID NO: 144) shows positive uptake inthe heart relative to the GdDTPA negative control. This collagen bindingpeptide is retained in the heart at 5 minutes compared to the GdDTPAcontrol.

7. Langendorff Heart Model

A. General Langendorff preparation

After deep anesthesia with pentobarbital (80 mg/kg ip), the chest cavityof a male Sprague Dawley rat (300 g) was opened, retracted and the heartwas removed immediately and placed in an ice-cold normal Krebs-Henseleit(K-H) solution (NaCl, 118 mM; KCl, 4.7 mM; CaCl₂, 2.5 mM; MgSO₄, 1.2 mM;KH₂PO₄, 1.2 mM; NaHCO₃, 25 mM; glucose, 5.5 mM). A K-H buffer filled 20Gauge needle was inserted into the apex of the heart penetrating intothe bottom of the chamber. This was attached to a pressure transducerused to record and monitor heart function. Perfusion pressure (˜60 mmHg)was monitored using a second transducer. The heart was perfused at aconstant flow rate of 10-12 mL/min with 37° C. Krebs-Henseleit buffersaturated with a mixture of 95% O₂ and 5% CO₂ gas. The heart was pacedat 300 beats/min.

B. Equilibrium Binding to Perfused Langendorff Rat Heart

Two peptide test articles, a high collagen binding peptide (SEQ ID NO:144) and a low collagen binding peptide (SEQ ID NO: 173), are comparedto GdDTPA. The appropriate test article was added to the K-H buffersolution to a total concentration of either 3 or 30 μM. Also added tothe K-H buffer was a radiotracer analog of each peptide or GdDTPA. Forthe peptides, the radiotracer was an aliquot of the appropriate 1-125labeled peptide derivative (see Example 5 for protocol). For GdDTPA, thetracer added was Tc-99m labeled DTPA. The amount of radioactivity addedto the buffer solution was 1-5 μCi.

The heart was perfused for a period of 10 minutes and the perfusionsolution was recycled through the heart. The total volume of K-H bufferused was 50-60 mL. After 10 min, the heart was removed from theapparatus and any connective tissue was removed. The heart was opened,fluid in the chambers drained, and the interior blotted dry with filterpaper. The heart was then weighed and the radioactivity in the heartmeasured with a Packard Cobra 5003 Gamma Scintillation counter. Analiquot of the K-H buffer was also weighed and counted. Studies wereperformed at least in duplicate.

Results:

Compound N Heart (nmol/g) Buffer (μM) Heart:Buffer SEQ ID NO: 144 5 9.8± 2.3 3.0 3.3 ± 0.8 SEQ ID NO: 173 3 1.1 ± 0.2 3.0 0.37 ± 0.08 GdDTPA 61.3 ± 0.3 3.0 0.42 ± 0.06 SEQ ID NO: 144 3 120 ± 50  30 4.0 ± 1.7 GdDTPA2  14 ± 1.0 30 0.46 ± 0.03

Conclusion:

GdDTPA is a marker of extracellular space. It is used as a negativecontrol. The amount of GdDTPA in the heart is representative of thebuffer present in the heart. SEQ ID NO: 173, a peptide with weakcollagen binding, exhibits similar heart concentrations as GdDTPA,indicating no specific uptake. SEQ ID NO: 144, a peptide with goodcollagen binding, exhibits about 10 times more heart uptake than GdDTPA.This indicates specific heart uptake for the collagen binding peptide.

C. Washout Kinetics of the Collagen Binding Peptide (SEQ ID NO: 144)from Perfused Langendorff Rat Heart

A Langendorff rat heart preparation was perfused with K-H buffer at arate of 10-12 mL/min. A one mL solution containing SEQ ID NO: 144 (300μM), radiolabeled (I-125) SEQ ID NO: 144 (1-6 μCi), GdDTPA (300 μM), andradiolabeled (Tc-99m) DTPA (5-8 μCi) was infused into the heart at arate of 1 mL/min. After the infusion was finished, the heart was eitherremoved or perfusion was allowed to continue for an additional 10minutes and then the heart was removed. The perfusion buffer was notrecirculated through the heart. After removal of any connective tissue,the heart was opened, fluid in the chambers drained, and the interiorblotted dry with filter paper. The heart was then weighed and theradioactivity in the heart measured with a Packard Cobra 5003 GammaScintillation counter. The Tc-99m counts were measured in the window128-165 keV; the 1-125 counts were measured in the window 15-75 keV witha 5% correction for spillover from the technetium. An aliquot of the K-Hbuffer was also weighed and counted. Concentration estimates were decaycorrected. Studies were performed at least in duplicate.

Results:

Time after Compound N infusion (min) Heart (% ID/g) SEQ ID NO: 144 3 04.6 ± 1.1 GdDTPA 3 0 2.9 ± 1.5 SEQ ID NO: 144 2 10 3.1 ± 1.6 GdDTPA 2 100.014 ± 0.002

Conclusion:

The collagen binding peptide (SEQ ID NO: 144) is significantly retainedin the heart after perfusion with buffer for 10 minutes. At 10 minutesafter infusion of the compounds, 68% of the peptide that was present at0 minutes post infusion remains, compared to only 0.5% for GdDTPA. Thisindicates that the collagen binding peptide (SEQ ID NO: 144) binds toand is retained by the heart.

8. Diagnostic Composition Synthesis

A. General Scheme for the Preparation of N-TerminusChelate-Functionalized Glu-DTPA-Gd Peptides:

B. General Procedure for the Preparation of N-TerminusChelate-Functionalized Glu-DTPA-Gd Peptides:

Peptide of interest was dissolved in DMF (5-7 mL/100 mg of resin). In aseparate vial, 1.5-2 eq of Glu-DTPE, HOBt and PyBop were added to DMF(10% volume of peptide mixture). DIEA was added until pH≈8 (measuredwith wet pH paper). After 5 to 10 minutes of pre-activation, the DTPAmixture was added to peptide and the pH was adjusted to ˜8 with DIEA.The mixture was agitated at RT for 4-18 hours.

The reaction was monitored by performing a mini-cleavage and globaldeprotection on a small aliquot of resin. The resin was first washedwith DMF (2 times) and ether (3 times). The peptide and the DTPApenta-ester was fully deprotected using a deprotection cocktail(TFA/MeSO₃H/Dodecanethiol/Water 85:5:5:5) for 30-120 minutes. Thedeprotection was monitored by LCMS.

The bulk of the reaction was deprotected after the monitoring showedless than 5% of starting peptide remained using the same deprotectioncocktail (5-7 ml/100 mg resin). The linear deprotected peptide ligandwas precipitated and triturated in ether to give a white solid.

Crude linear peptide-ligand was dissolved in DMSO (4-7 mL/100 mg solid).Water was added until the solution started to become cloudy and then alittle more DMSO was added to clear the solution. The pH was adjusted to˜7.5 with 1.0 N NaOH. The gadolinium chelate was prepared by adding 1.2eq GdCl₃ (based on initial loading of resin). The pH was adjusted to˜7.5-8-with 1N NaOH. Completion of reaction was determined by LC/MS(ammonium formate/Acetonitrile). Excess GdCl₃ was scavenged with 2 eq ofEDTA to scavenge.

Cyclic peptide-chelate was purified by preparative-HPLC using KromasilC4 or C18 columns and either bufferless conditions or 50 mM Ammonium.Formate/90:10 ACN: 50 mM Ammonium. Formate. The product wascharacterized by LC-MS.

The following peptides were derivatized on their N-terminus and/orC-terminus using the general procedure:

1. Glu-DTPA-Gd-W.W.T.C.H.M.T.W.S.G.Q.W.D.S.C.K.W.H-CONH₂ (Compound ID1020; SEQ ID NO: 184) was prepared following the general procedure aboveto give 0.3 mg of product with the correct molecular mass. TheC-terminus is capped with an —NH₂.

2. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G.Q.W.T.C.S.G.D.E.Y.T.W.H.C.NY.E-PEG-H (Compound ID 1021;SEQ ID NO: 185), having an N-terminal G linker and PEG-H at theC-terminus, was prepared following the general procedure to give 19.5 mgof product with the correct molecular mass.

3. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G.Q.W.H.C.T.T.R.F.P.H.H.Y.C.L.Y.G-PEG-H (Compound ID1022; SEQ ID NO: 186), having an N-terminal G linker and PEG-H at theC-terminus, was prepared following the general procedure (see additionaldetails, below) to give 78 mg of product with the correct molecularmass.

4. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G.G.D.W.T.C.V.G.D.H.K.T.W.K.C.N.F.H-CONH₂ (Compound ID1023; SEQ ID NO: 187), having an N-terminal G-G linker and a C-terminuscapped with —NH₂, was prepared following the general procedure to give143 mg of product with the correct molecular mass.

C. General Scheme for the Preparation of N- and C-TerminiChelate-Functionalized Glu-DTPA-Gd Peptides:

D. Synthesis of MR Phantom Study Contrast Agent, SEQ ID NO: 186 SEQ IDNO: 186, an MR contrast agent having the structureGd-Glu-DTPA-GQWHCTTRFPHHYCLYG-PEG-H, where G is the N-terminal linkerand PEG-His the C-terminal capping moiety, was prepared as describedbelow to give 78 mg of product with the correct molecular mass.

Protected peptide on resin (4.2 g, 0.6 mmol) was suspended in 40 mL ofDMF. The pH was adjusted to ≈8.5 with DIEA (wet pH paper test). Glu-DTPEacid (488 mg, 0.65 mmol., 1.1 eq.) dissolved in DMF (2 mL) was addedfollowed by PyBOP (0.33 g, 0.63 mmol., 1.05 eq.) and HOBt mono hydrate(0.10 g, 0.74 mmol., 1.23 eq.). The reaction mixture was shaken on anorbital shaker overnight. The resin was filtered off and wassuccessively washed with DMF (2 times) and ether (3 times). The peptidewas cleaved from the resin and globally deprotected with 50 mL ofdeprotection cocktail (TFA/Methanesulfonic acid/dodecanethiol 90:5:5),at room temperature for 2 h. The resin was filtered off and the peptidewas precipitated from the filtrate with ether to give an oily solid. Thecrude linear peptide was dissolved in a 3:1 mixture of DMSO and H₂O (4-7mL per 100 mg of linear peptide) and the pH was adjusted to 8 with DIEA.The cyclization was monitored by LC-MS.

The pH of the crude ligand solution was adjusted to 7.0 with 6N HCl andthe ligand was titrated (Xylenol orange method). Gadolinium chloride(0.18 mmol., 1 eq.) was added and the pH was adjusted to 6.5 with 1NNaOH. The chelation was monitored by LC-MS. The cyclic peptide chelatewas purified by reverse phase preparative HPLC using a gradient of 10 to50% B (A:H₂O, B: Acetonitrile).

General Procedure:

Coupling Step:

The peptide on resin was suspended in DMF (5-7 mL/100 mg resin). In aseparate vial, 1.5-2 eq of Glu-DTPE acid was activated by addition ofHOBt, and PyBOP in DMF (10% of the volume of peptide mixture) for 5-10min at pH≈8 obtained by addition of DIEA (measured with wet pH paper).Activated DTPE acid mixture was added to the solution of peptide and thepH was adjusted to ˜8 with DIEA. The mixture was shaken at RT for 4-18hours.

The reaction was monitored by taking an aliquot of resin in suspensionin DMF from the reaction mixture. The resin was washed with DMF (2times) and with ether (3 times). The peptide was cleaved from the resinand globally deprotected with the deprotection cocktail (TFA, MSA, DDT,Water 85:5:5:5) for 30-120 minutes. The reaction was stopped when lessthan 5% of the starting peptide was detected by LC-MS. Then the bulk ofthe reaction mixture was deprotected using the same conditions (5-7 mlof deprotection cocktail/100 mg resin). Crude peptide conjugate wasprecipitated with ether and triturated several times with ether to givethe desired ligand as a white solid.

Cyclization/Chelation Step:

Linear peptide DTPA conjugate was dissolved in DMSO (4-7 mL/100 mgsolid). Water was added until the solution became cloudy, and some DMSOwas added to clear the solution. The pH was adjusted with 1.0 N NaOH to˜7.5. Gadolinium chloride was added (1.2 eq., based on initial loadingof resin). The pH was maintained to ˜7.5-8 with 1N NaOH during thereaction. Completion of reaction was determined by LC/MS (aqueousammonium formate/acetonitrile gradient). Excess GdCl₃ was scavenged withEDTA (2 eq.) and then the peptide chelate DTPA conjugate was purified byreverse phase preparative HPLC using C-4 or C-18 Kromasil columns with abuffer (50 mM ammonium formate/90:10 acetonitrile/50 mM ammoniumformate) or without a buffer. The pure fractions were pooled togetherbased on the LC-MS analysis (neutral buffer method).

E. Preparation of Additional Contrast Agents

Other contrast agents prepared using the methods described aboveinclude:

1. Glu-DTPA-Gd-P-P-Q-W-H-C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G (Compound ID 1024;SEQ ID NO: 188), which includes a P-P linker on the N-terminus of thepeptide; the C-terminus is capped with —NH₂.

2. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G-G-T-W-R-C-D-Q-F-K-G-K-W-V-C-R-G-G (Compound ID 1025;SEQ ID NO: 189), which includes a -G-G- linker on the N-terminus of thepeptide; the C-terminus is capped with —NH₂.

3. Glu-DTPA-Gd-PEG(20)-G-Q-W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C-N-Y-e (Compound ID1026; SEQ ID NO: 190), where e is the D-form of E, and which includesthe Linker -PEG(20)-G- on the N-terminus and the C-terminus cappingmoiety of —NH₂.

Other contrast agents that could also be made using the above protocolinclude:

4. Glu-DTPA-Gd-P-P-Q-W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C-N-Y-E-P-P-Glu-DTPA-Gd(Compound ID 1027; SEQ ID NO: 191), which includes a P-P linker at boththe N and C termini.

5. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G-Q-W-H-C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G (Compound ID 1028; SEQID NO: 192), which includes a G linker on the N-terminus of the peptideand a C-terminal capping moiety of —NH₂.

6. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G-Q-W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C-N-Y-E (Compound ID 1029; SEQID NO: 193), which includes a G linker on the N-terminus of the peptide,and a C-terminal capping moiety of —NH₂.

7. Glu-DTPA-Gd-G-D-W-T-C-V-G-D-H-K-T-W-K-C-N-F-H (Compound ID 1030; SEQID NO: 194), which includes a G linker on the N-terminus of the peptide,and a C-terminal capping moiety of —NH₂.

The percent binding to human and rat collagen type I for variouschelate-derivatized peptides are set forth below.

TABLE 17 % Binding Chelate Conjugates SEQ ID Collagen I C-terminal NO:Human Rat Chelate Linker Peptide Sequence Moiety 188 70 55 Glu- PPQWHCTTRFPHHYCLYG NH₂ DTPA- Gd 186 36 38 Glu- G QWHCTTRFPHHYCLYG PEG-HDTPA- Gd 187 14 12 Glu- GG DWTCVGDHKTWKCNFH NH2 DTPA- Gd 185 48 13 Glu-G QWTCSGDEYTWHCNYE PEG-H DTPA- Gd 190 28 5 Glu- PEG(2O)GQWTCSGDEYTWHCNYe NH₂ DTPA- Gd 184 60 34 Glu- — WWTCHMTWSGQWDSCKWH NH₂DTPA- Gd 195 16 9 Glu- — WWGCRQGTGEHWSHCMWF PEG-Glu- DTPA- DTPA-Gd Gd196 60 34 Glu- — WWTCHMTWSGQWDSCKWH NH₂ DTPA- Gd

9. MR Phantom Study Collagen Imaging with SEQ ID NO. 186, “Compound ID1022”

A series of samples were prepared to demonstrate that a collagen bindingpeptide conjugated to a GdGluDTPA moiety could enhance the signal ofcollagen in an MR image. Compound ID 1022 was compared with GdDTPA aloneto show that the peptide part of Compound ID 1022 was necessary for thecontrast enhancement.

Collagen Stock Preparation:

Human Collagen Stock:

Acid soluble human collagen type I extracted from placenta (Sigma,cat#C7774, lot#083K375) was dissolved in 15 mM HCl (3.5 mg/mL) byvortexing and gently shaking for 3-4 hours at 4° C. The acid solublecollagen was dialyzed against PBS (pH 7.4). Protein concentration wasdetermined by the BCA method (Pierce, Cat#23225) using bovine collagen(Vitrogen, cat#FXP-019) as a reference standard. The final collagenconcentration for the stock solution was 9 μM.

Rat Collagen Stock:

Rat collagen (acid soluble, type I, rat tail, Upstate USA, Inc.Cat#08-115) was dialyzed against 10 mM Phosphate buffer (NaH₂PO₄, pH4.2). The final collagen concentration for the stock solution wasapprox. 12 μM.

Samples:

-   -   1. 10 μM Compound ID 1022 in PBS, pH 7.4    -   2. 10 μM Compound ID 1022 in a solution of 5.0 μM rat type I        collagen in 10 mM phosphate buffer, pH 5 incubated at 37° C.        overnight to form a gel    -   3. 10 μM Compound ID 1022 in a solution of 7.5 μM human type I        collagen in PBS, pH 7.4 incubated at 37° C. overnight to form a        gel    -   4. Sample prepared as sample 2, but centrifuged to separate        insoluble rat collagen gel    -   5. Sample prepared as sample 3, but centrifuged to separate        insoluble human collagen gel    -   6. 27 μM GdDTPA solution in PBS, pH 7.4    -   7. 27 μM GdDTPA in a solution of 5.0 μM rat type I collagen in        10 mM phosphate buffer, pH 5 incubated at 37° C. overnight to        form a gel    -   8. Sample prepared as in sample 7, but centrifuged to separate        insoluble rat collagen gel    -   9. Homogeneous gel of 5 μM rat collagen    -   10. Homogeneous gel of 7.5 μM human collagen

T1 was determined for samples 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 9, 10 at 0.47 Tesla using aBruker NMS120 minispec NMR analyzer operating at 37° C. The data arelisted below:

Sample number T1 (s)  1 - Compound ID 1022 in PBS 2.375  2 - Compound ID1022 in rat collagen gel 2.370  3 - Compound ID 1022 in human collagengel 2.100  6 - GdDTPA in PBS 2.437  7 - GdDTPA in rat collagen gel 2.410 9 - rat collagen blank 3.370 10 - human collagen blank 3.120

The Table shows that the presence of Gd(III) reduces the relaxationtimes of the samples as compared to the collagen blanks. It alsoindicates that GdDTPA and Compound ID 1022 samples are matched in termsof their T1 values.

Imaging Experiments

Samples for imaging were placed in glass tubes that were in turn placedin tubes containing water. Images were acquired at 4.7 T on a BrukerBiospec Imager using a Multi-Slice Multi-Echo Method with variableRelaxation Delay (MSMEVTR) experiment. The spin echo time and therelaxation delay were set to TE=11.2 ms and TR=500 ms, respectively witha flip angle of 30°. Images were acquired of sample 2, sample 4, sample7, and sample 8. As compared to the uncentrifuged sample (sample 2), thepellet for sample 4 was much brighter than the supernatant, indicatingthat Compound ID 1022 is associated with the collagen gel. Sample 7 and8 show uniform signal intensity. After the collagen gel is separated(sample 8), there is no increased concentration of GdDTPA in the gelrelative to the supernatant. This demonstrates the specificity ofCompound ID 1022 for collagen.

10. Myocardial Imaging with Compound ID 800

A 28 g C57BL/6 mouse was anesthetized using a 2% mixture of isofluranein oxygen and anesthesia was maintained with a 1% mixture. The mouseforelimbs were shaved and fitted with pediatric ECG leads (Blue Sensor,BRS-50-K/US, Ambu, Inc., Linthicum, Md.). The core body temperature andECG were monitored with an SAII Model 1025 monitoring and gating system(Small Animal Instruments, Inc., Stony Brook, N.Y.). Temperature wasmaintained at 37° C. using tubing that contained circulating,thermostated water. An i.v. line was implanted in the tail vein and themouse was placed in the magnet.

Images were acquired on a Varian 4.7-T Inova scanner. A cardiac-gatedgradient echo inversion recovery sequence was used whereby the inversiontime was set to null the signal from the myocardium. The inversion pulsewas a non-selective sinc pulse with a TI of 430 ms and TR of 3 seconds.The excitation is slice selective at 90 degrees and 3 to 4 lines wereacquired per TR. Scan time was 4-5 minutes.

Baseline images were acquired. Typically 3-4 short-axis slices wereacquired. After satisfactory baseline images were obtained, compound ID800 was administered by i.v. as a bolus at a dose of 25 μmol/kg andimaging commenced immediately post injection. Imaging was repeated outto an hour post injection.

A series of short-axis images are shown in FIG. 1. Immediately postinjection the myocardium and the blood pool increased in signalintensity followed by signal washout from the blood and slower washoutfrom the myocardium. To better quantify the images, region of interest(ROI) signal intensity (SI) measurements were made in the myocardium, inthe left ventricle, and compared to the standard deviation (SD) of thenoise. Four ROIs were measured in the myocardium and in the leftventricle and the average measurements was taken. Signal to noise ratios(SNR) were calculated as signal intensity in myocardium or blood dividedby the standard deviation of the noise. FIG. 2 shows SNR curves versustime for the myocardium and blood pool before and after injection ofcompound ID 800. Contrast to noise ratios (CNR) for myocardium relativeto blood pool was also calculated as:

CNR=(SI_(myocardium)−SI_(blood))/(SD_(noise)).

FIG. 3 shows CNR values versus time before and after injection ofcompound ID 800. These data show that compound ID 800 provides positiveenhancement of the myocardium that persists for at least 1 hour.

11. Myocardial Infarction Imaging Using Compound ID 800

A myocardial infarct (MI) was induced in a 28 g C57BL/6 mouse by a 1-hrocclusion of the left anterior descending coronary artery, followed byreperfusion. The mouse was allowed to recover. Seven days post MI, themouse was anesthetized using a 2% mixture of isoflurane in oxygen andanesthesia was maintained with a 1% mixture.

The mouse forelimbs were shaved and fitted with pediatric ECG leads(Blue Sensor, BRS-50-K/US, Ambu, Inc., Linthicum, Md.). The core bodytemperature and ECG were monitored with an SAII Model 1025 monitoringand gating system (Small Animal Instruments, Inc., Stony Brook, N.Y.).Temperature was maintained at 37° C. using tubing that containedcirculating, thermostated water. An i.v. line was implanted in the tailvein and the mouse was placed in the magnet.

Images were acquired on a Varian 4.7-T Inova scanner. A cardiac-gatedgradient echo inversion recovery sequence was used whereby the inversiontime was set to null the signal from the myocardium. The inversion pulsewas a non-selective sinc pulse with a TI of 430 ms and TR of 3 seconds.The excitation is slice selective at 90 degrees and 3 to 4 lines wereacquired per TR. Scan time was 4-5 minutes.

Baseline images were acquired. Typically 3-4 short-axis slices wereacquired. After satisfactory baseline images were obtained, compound ID800 was administered by i.v. as a bolus at a dose of 25 μmol/kg andimaging commenced immediately post injection. Imaging was repeated outto an hour post injection.

A series of short-axis images are shown in FIG. 4. Immediately postinjection the myocardium and the blood pool increased in signalintensity followed by signal washout from the blood and slower washoutfrom the myocardium. In this case, the myocardium did not enhanceuniformly. Infarcted regions of the heart were hyperenhanced as may beexpected because of the increased collagen content in infarcted regions.

These data show that compound ID 800 provides positive enhancement ofthe myocardium and hyperenhancement of infarcted zones and that theenhancement persists for at least 1 hour.

12. Example of Heart Uptake Using Compound ID 800

Male BALB/c mice were anesthetized with pentobarbital (80 mg/kg ip).Following deep anesthesia, a longitudinal incision was made above thebase of the abdomen up to just below the sternum. Internal organs werecarefully moved out of the body cavity to the left, exposing themesentery vein. Compound ID 800, at a dose of 10 mmol/kg, was injecteddirectly into the vessel. The animals were sacrificed at 1, 5, 15, orminutes post-injection. The heart and lungs were immediately removed andrinsed in saline, separated from each other and rinsed with salineagain. Both were removed and carefully dried before being prepared foranalysis. Organs were digested with nitric acid and gadolinium contentdetermined by ICP-MS. Gadolinium concentration in the heart was23.9±7.8, 33.9±4.5, 37±4.3, and 34.4±2.9 at 1, 5, 15, and 30 minutespost injection, respectively.

This data shows that compound ID 800 delivers gadolinium to the heartand that gadolinium is retained in the heart at least out to 30 minutes.

13. Further Synthesis of Peptides

Additional peptides were synthesized following the general protocoldescribed in Example 2. Peptide sequences are shown in Tables 18-41.Note that lower-case letter indicates the D-form of the amino acid.

TABLE 18 all peptides are cyclic with disulfide bond between the two cysteines: SEQ ID NO. Sequence 197G A W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 198 G Q A H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G199 G Q W A C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 200G Q W H C A T R F P H H Y C L Y G 201 G Q W H C T A R F P H H Y C L Y G202 G Q W H C T T A F P H H Y C L Y G 203G Q W H C T T R A P H H Y C L Y G 204 G Q W H C T T R F A H H Y C L Y G205 G Q W H C T T R F P A H Y C L Y G 206G Q W H C T T R F P H A Y C L Y G 207 G Q W H C T T R F P H H A C L Y G208 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C A Y G 209G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L A G

TABLE 19 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 210 G q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 211 G Q w H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 212 G Q W h C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G213 G Q W H c T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 214G Q W H C t T R F P H H Y C L Y G 215 G Q W H C T t R F P H H Y C L Y G216 G Q W H C T T r F P H H Y C L Y G 217G Q W H C T T R f P H H Y C L Y G 218 G Q W H C T T R F p H H Y C L Y G219 G Q W H C T T R F P h H Y C L Y G 220G Q W H C T T R F P H h Y C L Y G 221 G Q W H C T T R F P H H y C L Y G222 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y c L Y G 223G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C I Y G 224 G q w h c t t r f p h h y c I y G225 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L y G

TABLE 20 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 226 G Q 1-Nal H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G227 G Q 2-Nal H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 228 G Q thien-W H  C T T R F PH H Y C L Y G 229 G Q Y H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 230 G Tic H  C T T RF P H H Y C L Y G 231 G Q W(5-OH) H C T T S F P H H Y C L Y G

TABLE 21 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 232 G Q W S C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 233 GQ W Aib C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 234 cbz-G Q W K C T T R F P H H Y C LY G 235 G Q W S C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 236 G Q W N C T T L F P H H YC L Y G 237 G Q W D C T T L F P H H Y C L Y G 238 G K(G)  W Y C T T Y FP H H Y C L Y G

TABLE 22 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 239 G Q W H C Aib T R F P H H Y C L Y G 240cbz-G Q W H C K T R F P H H Y C L Y G 241 G Q W H C Aib T R F P H H Y CL Y G 242 G Q W H C V T L F P H H Y C L Y G 243 G Q W H C I T L F P H HY C L Y G 244 G Q W H C S T L F P H H Y C L Y G 245 G Q W H C Y T L F PH H Y C L Y G 246 G Q W H C G T L F P H H Y C L Y G 247 G K(G) W H CY(3-I) T Y F P H H Y C L Y G

TABLE 23 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 248 G Q W H C T n R F P H H Y C L Y G 249 GQ W H C T s R F P H H Y C L Y G 250 G Q W H C T y R F P H H Y C L Y G251 G Q W H C T r R F P H H Y C L Y G 252 G Q W H C T V L F P H H Y C LY G 253 G Q W H C T I L F P H H Y C L Y G 254 G Q W H C T N L F P H H YC L Y G 255 G Q W H C T Y L F P H H Y C L Y G 256 cbz-G Q W H C T Dpr RF P H H Y C L Y G 257 G Q W H C T Dpr R F P H H Y C L Y G 258 cbz-G Q WH C T K R F P H H Y C L Y G 259 G Q W H C T K R F P H H Y C L Y G 260cbz-G Q W H C T Orn R F P H H Y C L Y G 261 G Q W H C T Orn R F P H H YC L Y G 262 G Q W H C T D R F P H H Y C L Y G 263 G K(G) W H C Y K Y F PH H Y C L Y G

TABLE 24 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 264 G Q W H C T T S F P H H Y C L Y G 265 GQ W H C T T D F P H H Y C L Y G 266 G Q W H C T T L F P H H Y C L Y G267 G Q W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 268 cbz-G Q W H C T T K F P H H YC L Y G 269 G Q W H C T T Aib F P H H Y C L Y G 270 G Q W H C T TY(3-Cl) F P H H y C L Y G 271 G Q W H C T T I F P H H y C L Y G 272 G QW H C T T Cha F P H H y C L Y G 273 G Q W H C T T Abu F P H H Y C L Y G274 G Q W H C T T F(4-F) F P H H Y C L Y G 275 G Q W H C T T Dopa F P HH Y C L Y G 276 G Q W H C T T Tle F P H H Y C L Y G 277 G Q W H C T TCit F P H H Y C L Y G

TABLE 25 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 278 G Q W H C T T R Y P H H Y C L Y G 279 GQ W H C T T R Bip P H H Y C L Y G 280 G Q W H C T T R F(4-CF3) P H H Y CL Y G 281 G Q W H C T T R 4-PaI P H H Y C L Y G 282 G Q W H C T T R1-NaI P H H Y C L Y G 283 G Q W H C T T R F(4-NO2) P H H Y C L Y G 284 GQ W H C T T R Hfe P H H Y C L Y G 285 G Q W H C T T D Bpa P H H Y C L YG 286 G Q W H C T T D F(4-CN) P H H Y C L Y G 287 G Q W H C T T DF(4-NH2) P H H Y C L Y G 288 G Q W H C T T D F(3,4-OMe) P H H Y C L Y G289 G Q W H C T T D 2-NaI P H H Y C L Y G 290 G Q W H C T T D Y(3-Cl) PH H Y C L Y G

TABLE 26 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 291 PP Q W H C T T R F P(3-OH) H H Y C L YG 292 G Q W H C T T S F ΔPro H H Y C L Y G 293 G Q W H C T T S F Pip H HY C L Y G 294 G Q W H C T T R F N-Me-A H H Y C L Y G 295 D W S C T T D YP(3-OH) A H y C L Y G

TABLE 27 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 296 G Q W H C T T R F P S H Y C L Y G 297cbz-G Q W H C T T R F P K H Y C L Y G 298 G Q W H C T T R F P Aib H Y CL Y G 299 G Q W H C T T L F P N H Y C L Y G 300 A W H C T T R F P A H YC L Y G 301 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P Y H Y C L Y G 302 G Q W H C T T R F PH S Y C L Y G 303 G Q W H C T T R F P H Aib Y C L Y G 304 G Q W H C T TD F P H Dpr Y C L Y G 305 G Q W H C T T D F P H 2-Pal Y C L Y G 306 G QW H C T T L F P H N Y C L Y G 307 G Q W H C T T L F P H D Y C L Y G 308G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H Y Y C L Y G 309 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H W Y CL Y G

TABLE 28 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 310 G Q W H C T T R F P H H 1-NaI C L Y G311 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Bip C L  Y G 312 G Q W H C T T R F P H H r CL Y G 313 G Q W H C T T R F P H H bip C L Y G 314 G Q W H C T T R F P HH 1-nal C L Y G 315 G Q W H C T T R F P H H t C L Y G 316 G Q W H C T TL F P H H 1-NaI C L Y G 317 G Q W H C T T S F P H H Dopa C L Y G 318 G QW H C T T R F P H H h-Tyr C L Y G 319 G Q W H C T T R F P H H h-Tyr(Me)C L Y G 320 G Q W H C T T R F P H H F(3-OMe) C L Y G 321 G K(G) W H C TT Y F P H H Bip C L Y G 322 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P  H H Y(3-Cl) C L Y G323 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P  H H Y(2,6-Me2) C L Y G 324 G K(G) W H C T TY F P H H V C L Y G 325 G K(G) W H C T T L F P H H V C L Y G 326 G K(G)W H C T T Y F P H H Dip C L Y G 327 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Dip C L YG 328 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P  H H F(4-NH2) C L Y G 329 G K(G) W H C Y TY F P H H 1-NaI C L Y G

TABLE 29 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 330 G Q W H Pen T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 331G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y Pen L Y G 332 G Q W H Pen T T R F P H H Y PenL Y G

TABLE 30 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 333 cbz-G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C K Y G334 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C Aib Y G 335 G Q W H C T T L F P H H Y CI Y G 336 G Q W H C T T L F P H H Y C V Y G 337 G Q W H C T T L F P H HY C Hse Y G 338 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C F Y G 339 G Q W H C T T R FP H H Y C Hfe Y G

TABLE 31 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 340 G Q W H C T T D F P H H Y C L Bpa G 341G Q W H C T T D F P H H Y C L F G 342 G Q W H C T T D F P H H Y C L2-Nal G 343 G Q W H C T T D F P H H Y C L Y(3-CI) G 344 G Q W H C T T LF P H H Y C L 2-Nal G 345 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Dip G 346 GK(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L F(4-NH2) G

TABLE 32 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 347 G Q Y T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 348 GQ 1-Nal T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 349 D thien-W T C S G D E Y T W H CN Y E 350 D W(5-OH) T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 351 G Q W T C S G D E YT Y H C N Y E 352 G Q W T C S G D E Y T 1-Nal H C N Y E 353 D W T C S GD E Y T thien-W H C N Y E 354 D W T C S G D E Y T W(5-OH) H C N Y E 355D W T C S G D E Y T b-h-W H C N Y E 356 D W T C S G D E Y T H H C N Y E

TABLE 33 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 357 D W T C R G D E Y T W H C N Y E 358 D WT C y G D E Y T W H C N Y E 359 D W T C P G D E Y T W H C N Y E 360 D WT C Y G D E Y T W H C N Y E 361 D W T C b-h-S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 362D W T C L G D E Y T W H C N Y E 363 D W T C 3-NO2Y G D E Y T W H C N Y E364 D W T C 3-NO2Y G D E Y T W H C N Y E 365 D W T C 4-Pal G D E Y T W HC N Y E 366 D W T C 4-CO2H-F G D E Y T W H C N Y E 367 D W T C 4-tBu-F GD E Y T W H C N Y E 368 D W T C F(4-NH2) G D E Y T W H C N Y E 369 D W TC Y(Bn,3-CI) G D E Y T W H C N Y E 370 G Q W T C Y G D E Y T W H C N Y E371 D W T C Aib G D E Y T W H C N Y E

TABLE 34 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 372 PP Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 373G Q W H C T T R F Y T W H C L Y E 374 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G375 G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G 376 W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G377 GK(G) Q W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 378 G Q W H C T T L F P H H yC L Y G 379 G A W H C T T L F P H H y C L Y G 380 A W H C T T L F P H Hy C L Y G 381 G D W H C T T L F P H H y C L Y G 382 G S W H C T T L F PH H y C L Y G 383 P P W H C T T L F P H H y C L Y G 384 G Q W H C T T YF P H H y C L Y G 385 G A W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y G 386 G. K(G) W HC T T L F P H H y C L Y G 387 G Abu W H C T T S F P H H y C L Y G 388 GCit W H C T T S F P H H y C L Y G 389 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L YG 390 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y G 391 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P HH y C L Y G 392 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y Y 393 G K(G) W H C TT Y F P H H y C L Y Y 394 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y Bip 395KK(K) GQ W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y G 396 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H yC L Y G 397 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y G 398 G K(G) W H C T T YF P H H y C L Y G 399 G K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H y C L Y F(4-NHS) 400 GK(G) W H C T T K F P H H y C L Y Bip

TABLE 35 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 401 G K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y G402 G K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Y 403 G K(G) W H C T T K F P H HY C L Y Y 404 GY K(Y.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 405 GV K(V.G) W HC T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 406 GF K(F.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G407 GH K(H.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 408 K K W H C Y T Y F P H HY C V Y G 409 Dpr Dpr(Dpr) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 410 KK(K) W H CY T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 411 G Q W T C S G D E P H H Y C L Y G 412 G Q WT C S G D F P H H Y C L Y G 413 G Q W T C S G D F P H H Y C L Y G 414 GQ W T C S G R F P H H Y C L Y G

TABLE 36 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 415 cbz-G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G K416 cbz-G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G k 417 cbz-G Q W H C T T R F PH H Y C L Y G Peg K 418 cbz-G Q W H C T T R F P H H Y C L Y G KK 419 G QW H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G peg(1xO) 420 G Q W H C Y T L F P H H Y C LY G 1,4-AMB 421 G Q W H C Y T L F P H H Y C L Y G 1,4-AMB 422 G Q W H CY T L F P H H Y C L Y G 1,3-AMB 423 G Q W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G1,4-AMB 424 G Q W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 1,3-AMB 425 G Q W H C T TY F P H H Y C L Y G 1,3-AMB 426 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G K427 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y Y K 428 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P HH Y C L Y Y K 429 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 430 G K(G) W HC Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y Bip K 431 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G1,4AMB 432 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y F K 433 G K(G) W H C Y T YF P H H Y C L Y Y K 434 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 435 GK(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y y K 436 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y CL Y V K 437 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y V K 438 G Q W H C Y T K FP H H Y C L Y G K 439 G Q W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y G K 440 G K(G) W HC Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y G K 441 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G1,6-Hex 442 G K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G PEG

TABLE 37 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 443 D W T C S G P E Y T W H C N Y E 444 D WT C S G b-h-D E Y T W H C N Y E 445 D W T C S G L E Y T W H C N Y E 446G Q W T C S G K(Boc) E Y T W H C N Y E 447 D W T C S G Aib E Y T W H C NY E

TABLE 38 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 448 D W T C S G D E D T W H C N Y E 449 D WT C S G D E R T W H C N Y E 450 D W T C S G D E P T W H C N Y E 451 D WT C S G D E Y(3-I) T W H C N Y E 452 D W T C S G D E b-h-y T W H C N Y E453 D W T C S G D E Aib T W H C N Y E 454 D W T C S G D E Y T W H C NY(3-I) E

TABLE 39 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 455 EAG Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 456G Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E GTE 457 EAG Q W T C S G D E Y T W H CN Y E GTE 458 G Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y e PEG(1xO) 459 G Q W T C SG D E Y T W H C N Y e K 460 PPG Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y e K

TABLE 40 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 461 PPG Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y e 462D W T C S G D Y Y T W H C N Y E 463 G q w t c s G d e y t w h c n y e464 D W T C S G D E Y D W H C N Y E 465 D W T C S G D E Y R W H C N Y E466 D W T C S G D R Y T W H C N Y E 467 D W T C S G D L Y T W H C N Y E468 G Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C N 469 G Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C 470 GQ W T C S G D Y T W H C N Y E 471 D W T C S G D E Y P W H C N Y E 472 DW T C S G D E Y Y W H C N Y E 473 D W T C S G D E Y T W D C N Y E 474 DW T C S G D E Y T W Y C N Y E 475 PP Q W T C S G D E Y T W H C A Y E 476PP Q W T C S G D A Y T W H C A Y E 477 G Q W T C S G D A Y T W S C N Y E478 D W T C S G D E Y T W P C N Y E 479 D W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E480 D W T C S G D E Y T W H C P Y E 481 D W T C S G D E Y L W H C N Y E482 G Q W T C S G D A Y T W S C N Y E 483 D W P C S G D E Y T W H C N YE 484 D W T C S G D Aib Y T W H C N Y E 485 G Q W T C S k D E Y T W H CN Y E 486 Aib W T C S G D E Y T W H C N Y E 487 D W Aib C S G D E Y T WH C N Y E 488 D W T C S G D E Aib T W H C N Y E 489 D W T C S G D E YAib W H C N Y E 490 D W T C S G D E Y T W Aib C N Y E 491 D W T C S G DE Y T W H C N Y Aib

TABLE 41 SEQ ID NO. Sequence 492 D W T C S b-h-G D E Y T W H C N Y E 493D W T C S G D b-h-E Y T W H C N Y E 494 D W T C S G D E b-h-Y T W H C NY E 495 D W T C S G D E Y b-h-T W H C N Y E

The unnatural amino acids listed in Tables 18-41 are abbreviated as:

Abbreviation Name 1-Nal L-1-Naphthylalanine 2-Nal L-2-Naphthylalanine2-Pal L-2-Pyridylalanine 3-NO2 Y L-3-Nitrotyrosine 4-CO2H-FL-4-carboxyphenylalanine 4-Pal L-4-Pyridylalanine 4-tBu-FL-4-tert-Butylphenylalanine Abu L-α-Aminobutyic acid Aib Aminoisobutyricacid b-h-D L-β-homoaspartic acid b-h-S L-β-homoserine b-h-WL-β-homotryptophan b-h-Y L-β-homotyrosine Bip L-Biphenylalanine bipD-Biphenylalanine Bpa L-4-Benzoylphenylalanine Cha L-CyclohexylalanineCit L-Citrulline Dip L-Diphenylalanine Dopa L-3,4-DihydroxyphenylalanineΔPro L-3,4-Dehydroproline F(3,4-OMe2) L-3,4-DimethoxyphenylalanineF(3-OMe) L-3-Methoxyhenylalanine F(4-CF3)L-4-Trifluoromethylphenylalanine F(4-CN) L-4-Cyanophenylalanine F(4-F)L-4-Fluorophenylalanine F(4-NH2) L-4-Aminophenylalanine F(4-NO2)L-4-Nitrophenylalanine Hfe L-Homophenylalanine Hse L-Homoserine h-TyrL-Homotyrosine h-Tyr(Me) L-O-methylhomotyrosine N-Me-AN-Methyl-L-alanine Orn L-Ornithine P(3-OH) L-3-Hydroxyproline PenL-Penicillamine Pip L-Pipecolic acid thien-W L-3-Benzothienylalanine TicL-1,2,3,4-Tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid Tle L-tert-LeucineW(5-OH) L-5-Hydroxytryptophan Y(2,6-Me2) L-2,6-Dimethyltyrosine Y(3-Cl)L-3-Chlorotyrosine Y(3-I) L-3-Iodotyrosine Y(Bn, 3-Cl)L-3-Chloro-O-benzyltyrosine

The full names of the abbreviation of linkers used in Tables 18-41 aregiven below:

Abbreviation Name 1,3-AMB 1,3-Bis(aminomethyl)benzene 1,4-AMB1,4-Bis(aminomethyl)benzene 1,6-Hex 1,6-Diaminohexane PEG8-Amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid peg(1xO) 2,2′-Oxydiethylamine PEG(1xO)2,2′-OxydiethylamineAll other non-natural amino acids are known to those of ordinary skillin the art.

12. Synthesis of GdDTPA-Peptide Conjugates with Thiourea Linkages

A. Preparation of GdDTPA-ITC solution. The ligand2-(4-isothiocyanatobenzyl)-diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA-ITC)was purchased from Macrocyclics as the tris hydrochloride salt.DTPA-ITC, 1.72 g (2.65 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of distilleddeionized water and the pH adjusted to 6 by addition of 1 M NaOH.GdCl₃.6H₂O, 781 mg (2.1 mmol) was added with stirring and the pHre-adjusted to 6 with 1 M NaOH. Another 186 mg (0.55 mmol) of GdCl₃.6H₂Owas added and the pH re-adjusted to 6. The reaction was complete asdetermined by LC-MS analysis. The final volume was 43.6 mL resulting ina concentration of 59.6 mM GdDTPA-ITC.

B. General Procedures for GdDTPA-Peptide Conjugates with ThioureaLinkages.

i. Microwave synthesis. Purified cyclized peptide (0.05 mmol) containingN primary amines is suspended in 10 mL pH 7.5 phosphate buffer (200 mMPi). GdDTPA-ITC solution (59.6 mM) is added in excess (2×N amines×0.05mmol peptide), typically 1-5 mL of solution. The mixture is heated to80° C. for 20 min using an Emrys Optimizer microwave synthesizer. Thesolution is allowed to cool to room temperature and the conjugatepurified and isolated by preparative HPLC (Kromasil C18 colum) using agradient of increasing acetonitrile (ACN) into an aqueous ammoniumformate (50 mM) mobile phase.

ii. Room temperature synthesis. Purified cyclized peptide (0.05 mmol)containing N primary amines is suspended in 10 mL pH 9 borate buffer(100 mM). GdDTPA-ITC solution (59.6 mM) is added in excess (5×Namines×0.05 mmol peptide). The mixture is stirred at room temperatureovernight. The conjugate is purified and isolated by preparative HPLC(Kromasil C18 colum) using a gradient of increasing acetonitrile (ACN)into an aqueous ammonium formate (50 mM) mobile phase.

C. Synthesis of Compound ID 800. Peptide, SEQ ID NO. 400 (0.0133 mmol)was suspended in 3 mL of pH 9 borate buffer. Gd-DTPA-ITC (3.0 mL of a59.6 mM solution, 0.18 mmol) was added and the solution stirred at roomtemperature for 69 hours. The product was isolated directly bypreparative HPLC and elutes at approximately 35% ACN. Pure fractionswere combined and salts were removed by loading the compound onto a 5 gC18 SepPak column and eluting the salts with water. The pure compoundwas eluted with 50% water/ethanol solution. After removal of solvent16.2 mg of product was obtained with correct molecular weight by LC-MS.

D. Synthesis of Compound ID 801. Peptide, SEQ ID NO. 408 (0.043 mmol)was suspended in a mixture of 10 mL pH 7.5 phosphate buffer (200 mM) and5 ml ACN in a microwave reaction vessel. Gd-DTPA-ITC (3.4 mL of a 59.6mM solution, 0.203 mmol) was added. The mixture was heated in themicrowave for 20 min at 80° C. A clear solution was obtained. Theproduct was isolated directly by preparative HPLC and elutes between20-30% acetonitrile. The product was analyzed by LC-MS and gave thecorrect mass.

14. Synthesis of GdDOTAGA-Peptide Conjugates with Amide Linkages

A. General procedure for peptide-Gd-DOTAGA conjugates.

Coupling: The peptide (0.05 mmol) containing N primary amines isdissolved in DMF (15 ml). t-butyl protectedDOTAGA-pentafluorophenylester (2×N primary amines×0.05 mmol) is addedand the pH of the reaction mixture adjusted to 7.5 withdi-isopropylethylamine (DIEA). The reaction is stirred overnight at roomtemperature and then the solvent is removed in vacuo. Conversion toproduct is confirmed by LC-MS and the product is used without furtherpurification.

Deprotection: The crude product, protected DOTAGA-peptide conjugate, isdissolved in a mixture of TFA/methanesulfonic acid/TIS/water/phenol (20ml, 18:0.5:0.5:0.5:0.5) and stirred for 20 min at room temperature andthen poured into ether giving a white precipitate. The precipitate wasisolated by centrifugation followed by decanting the solvent. The crudedeprotected DOTAGA-peptide conjugate was not purified.

Chelation: The crude ligand is dissolved in H₂O and the pH adjusted to 6with a 1 N NaOH solution. Solid GdCl₃.6H₂O (1.1×N primary amines×0.05mmol peptide) is added at RT and the pH re-adjusted to 6.5. The reactionis allowed to proceed overnight and results in a cloudy suspension. Thechelation reaction is checked by LC-MS to ensure that it has gone tocompletion. A solution of 100 mM EDTA (to scavenge the excess gadoliniumions) is added dropwise with stirring until the solution became clear.

Purification: The crude product is purified by preparative HPLC(Kromasil C18, ammonium formate (50 mM)/ACN) and the purified productanalyzed by LC-MS.

B. Synthesis of Compound ID 802. See reaction scheme below. Peptide, SEQID 408 (0.061 mmol) labeled as 1 in synthesis scheme was dissolved in 15mL of DMF. t-butyl protected DOTAGA-pentafluorophenylester, 2, (0.366mmol) was added and DIEA added to adjust the pH to 7.5. After reactionat room temperature overnight, the solvent was removed under reducedpressure. The crude solid, 3, was dissolved in a 20 mL mixture ofTFA:methane sulfonic acid:TIS:water:phenol (18:0.5:0.5:0.5:0.5) andstirred for 20 min at room temperature. The deprotected ligand, 4, wasobtained after precipitation with ether. The solid was then taken up in25 mL water and neutralized by addition of 1 M NaOH until the pH was6.5. Solid GdCl₃.6H₂O (75 mg, 0.20 mmol) was added at RT and the pHre-adjusted to 6.5. The solution was stirred overnight and the resultantsolution was cloudy. Na₂H₂EDTA solution (0.1 M) was added dropwise withstirring until the solution became clear. The resultant solution waspurified by preparative HPLC (Kromasil C18, ammonium formate (50mM)/ACN) and the product, 5, eluted at 45% ACN. The product was analyzedby LC-MS and gave the correct mass.

15. Synthesis of Compound ID 803 A Dual Peptide, Gadolinium Tetramer

A. Synthesis of bb-DTPE Tetramer Diacid.

Synthesis of Bis-Amide

1,6 diaminohexane and hydroxysuccinimide ester of Boc-Glu(OBn)-OH weredissolved in dichloromethane and the mixture was stirred for 5 h at RT.The solvent was evaporated and the resulting solid was washed with EtOActo give the desired bis-amide (M+1=755.5) in a 93% yield.

Deprotection of the Boc Groups

The di-Boc protected derivative was dissolved in 2:1 mixture ofdichloromethane/TFA and the mixture was stirred for 2 h at RT. Themixture was concentrated to half of the initial volume and the diaminewas precipitated with ether as a TFA salt in a 68% yield.

Coupling of Diamine with Di-Boc-Diaminopropanoic Acid.

Boc-dap-(Boc)-OH DHCA salt was suspended in 0.5 N KHSO₄ and the freeacid was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic fractions were driedover Na₂SO₄ and evaporated to dryness. The acid and the diamine weredissolved in dichloromethane and HOBt, H₂O, DIEA and DIC weresuccessively added under argon at 0° C. The mixture was stirred for 20hr between 0° C. and RT. The desired product was obtained as a whitesolid after filtration of the reaction mixture and several washes with1:1 ether/dichloromethane and then with ether resulting in a 75% yield.

Deprotection of the Boc groups.

Boc-protected tetramine was dissolved in a 1:2 TFA/dichloromethane andthe solution was stirred for 1 h. The mixture was evaporated to drynessand the residue was triturated with 4 M HCl in dioxane and the mixturewas concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was triturated with4 M HCl in dioxane and the mixture diluted with ether. The desiredtetramine was obtained as a tetrahydrochloride salt in a 89% yield.

Coupling of bb-DTPE to Tetramine.

Acid and tetramine were dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of acetonitrile/DMFand the pH was adjusted to 9 (wet pH paper test) with DIEA. DIC and HOBtwere added and the pH was adjusted to 9 with DIEA. The reaction mixturewas stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with water andextracted with EtOAc. The organic layers were combined and washedsuccessively with saturated NaHCO₃, 0.1 N HCl solution and with brineand then dried over Na₂SO₄. The desired tetramer was obtained afterpurification by flash chromatography on silica gel using for eluent agradient of Hexanes/1-PrOH/DIEA 20:1:0.1 to 15:1:0.1 in a 50% yield.

Deprotection of the Diacid

The di-benzyl ester was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture ofEtOAC/dichloromethane. The mixture was shaken overnight in a Parr bottleunder 45 psi H₂ in the presence of 10% Palladium on carbon (12.5% byweight). The desired acid was obtained after filtration of the catalystand evaporation of the solvents (M+2=1674.6; M+3=1116.8; M+4=837.8).

B. Synthesis of Protected Dual Peptide-Tetramer.

Coupling of the Diacid Tetramer to the N-Terminus of the Peptide.

The diacid, SEQ ID NO. 264 peptide (1.5 eq. per acid) and HOBt, 1H₂Owere dissolved in DMF. DIC (1.1 eq. per acid) dissolved in DMF was addedand the pH was adjusted to 7-8 with DIEA. The reaction was monitored byLC-MS. The protected tetramer was purified by HPLC with a C4 columnusing a gradient of 0.1% TFA in ACN/H₂O.

Deprotection of Dual Peptide-Tetramer

Protected tetramer-dual peptide was dissolved in the deprotectioncocktail mixture (10 ml/80 mg of tetramer dual peptide) composed ofTFA/methanesulfonic acid/TIS/H₂O 87.5:2.5:5:5 and the solution wasstirred for 1.5 h at RT. The crude ligand was obtained afterprecipitation with ether and filtration.

Chelation and Purification of Compound ID 803.

The crude ligand was dissolved in H₂O and the pH was adjusted to 6 with1 N NaOH. Solid GdCl₃.6H₂O (4.5 eq) was added at RT and the pHre-adjusted to 6.5. The solution was stirred for an hour and theresultant solution was cloudy. Na₂H₂EDTA solution (0.1 M) was addeddropwise with stirring until the solution became clear. The resultantsolution was purified by preparative HPLC (Kromasil C18, ammoniumformate (50 mM)/ACN). The product was analyzed by LC-MS and gave thecorrect mass.

16. Langendorff Heart Model

A. General Langendorff Preparation

After deep anesthesia with pentobarbital (80 mg/kg ip), the chest cavityof a male Sprague Dawley rat (300 g) was opened, retracted and the heartwas removed immediately and placed in an ice-cold normal Krebs-Henseleit(K-H) solution (NaCl, 118 mM; KCl, 4.7 mM; CaCl₂, 2.5 mM; MgSO₄, 1.2 mM;KH₂PO₄, 1.2 mM; NaHCO₃, 25 mM; glucose, 5.5 mM). A K-H buffer filled 20Gauge needle was inserted into the apex of the heart penetrating intothe bottom of the chamber. This was attached to a pressure transducerused to record and monitor heart function. Perfusion pressure (˜60 mmHg)was monitored using a second transducer. The heart was perfused at aconstant flow rate of 10-12 mL/min with 37° C. Krebs-Henseleit buffersaturated with a mixture of 95% O₂ and 5% CO₂ gas. The heart was pacedat 300 beats/min.

B. Equilibrium Binding to Perfused Langendorff Rat Heart

The dual peptide gadolinium tetramer (Compound ID 803) was compared toGdDTPA. Compound ID 803 and GdDTPA were added to the K-H buffer solutionto a total concentration of 3 μM. Also added to the K-H buffer was aradiotracer analog of Compound ID 803 or GdDTPA. For Compound ID 803,the radiotracer was an aliquot of the In-111 labeled compound. ForGdDTPA, the tracer added was Tc-99m labeled DTPA. The amount ofradioactivity added to the buffer solution was 1-5 μCi.

The heart was perfused for a period of 10 minutes and the perfusionsolution was recycled through the heart. The total volume of K-H bufferused was 50-60 mL. After 10 min, the heart was removed from theapparatus and any connective tissue was removed. The heart was opened,fluid in the chambers drained, and the interior blotted dry with filterpaper. The heart was then weighed and the radioactivity in the heartmeasured with a Packard Cobra 5003 Gamma Scintillation counter. Analiquot of the K-H buffer was also weighed and counted. Studies wereperformed at least in duplicate.

Results:

Heart Compound N (nmol/g) Buffer (μM) Heart:Buffer Comp ID 803 2 9.1 ±1.8  3.0 3.02 ± 0.62 GdDTPA 3 1.4 ± 0.02 3.0 0.46 ± 0.05

Conclusion:

GdDTPA is a marker of extracellular space. It was used as a negativecontrol. The amount of GdDTPA in the heart is representative of thebuffer present in the heart. Compound ID 803, with good collagenbinding, exhibits about 7 times more heart uptake than GdDTPA. Thisindicates specific heart uptake for the collagen binding compound.

C. Washout Kinetics of the Collagen Binding Compound (Compound ID NO:803) from Perfused Langendorff Rat Heart

A Langendorff rat heart preparation was perfused with K-H buffer at arate of 10-12 mL/min. A one mL solution containing Compound ID NO:803(300 μM), radiolabeled (In-111) Compound ID NO:803 (1-6 μCi), GdDTPA(300 μM), and radiolabeled (Tc-99m) DTPA (5-8 μCi) was infused into theheart at a rate of 1 mL/29639-0002002 min. After the infusion wasfinished, the heart was either removed or perfusion was allowed tocontinue for an additional 10 minutes and then the heart was removed.The perfusion buffer was not recirculated through the heart. Afterremoval of any connective tissue, the heart was opened, fluid in thechambers drained, and the interior blotted dry with filter paper. Theheart was then weighed and the radioactivity in the heart measured witha Packard Cobra 5003 Gamma Scintillation counter. The Tc-99m counts weremeasured in the window 128-165 keV; the 1-125 counts were measured inthe window 15-75 keV with a 5% correction for spillover from thetechnetium. An aliquot of the K-H buffer was also weighed and counted.Concentration estimates were decay corrected. Studies were performed atleast in duplicate.

Results:

Compound N Time after infusion (min) Heart (% ID/g) Comp ID 803 3 0 2.03± 0.23 GdDTPA 3 0 2.53 ± 0.50 Comp ID 803 3 10 1.09 ± 0.53 GdDTPA 2 100.056 ± 0.011

Conclusion:

The collagen binding compound (Compound ID No: 803) is significantlyretained in the heart after perfusion with buffer for 10 minutes. At 10minutes after infusion of the compounds, 54% of Compound ID No: 803 thatwas present at 0 minutes post infusion remains, compared to only 2.2%for GdDTPA. This indicates that the collagen binding compound (CompoundID NO: 803) binds to and is retained by the heart.

17. GdDTPA Substituted Peptides

A. N-Terminal Functionalized Peptide-Chelate Conjugates

TABLE 42Examples of peptide-chelate conjugates. In this table, Gd^(T) is GdDTPA-thiourea, Gd^(G) is GdDTPA-glutamate(GluDTPA), Gd^(GM) is GdDOTA-GlyMe, and Gd^(D) is GdDOTAGA. SEQ SEQ CompID ID ID NO NO Sequence  800 496 496 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T TK(Gd^(T))  801 497 497 Gd^(T) K(Gd^(T)) K(Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  802 498498 Gd^(T) DK(Gd^(D)) K(Gd^(D)) W H C Y T Y  807 499 499 Gd^(T) G Q W HC T T R  808 500 500 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  813 501 501 Gd^(T) G Q W HC T T K(Gd^(T))  815 502 502 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  816 503 503 Gd^(T)G Q W H C T T Y  820 504 504 Gd^(G) G Q W T C S G D  821 505 505 Gd^(G)D W T C S r D  822 506 506 Gd^(G) D W T C R G D  823 507 507 Gd^(G) G QW T C S G D  824 508 508 Gd^(G) P W T C S G D  825 509 509 Gd^(T) D W TC Y(Bn,3-Cl) G D  826 510 510 Gd^(T) G Q W T C Y G D  827 511 511 Gd^(T)D W T C F(4-tBu) G D  828 512 512 Gd^(T) D W T C F(4-CO2H) G D  829 513513 Gd^(T) D W T C S y D  830 514 514 Gd^(T) G A W T C S G D  831 515515 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  832 516 516 Gd^(T) G Q W T C S G D  833 517517 Gd^(T) G Q W T C S G D  834 518 518 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  835 519519 Gd^(T) D W T C S a D  836 520 520 Gd^(T) D W T C S s D  837 521 521Gd^(T) G Q W T C S G D  838 522 522 Gd^(GM) G Q W T C S G D  839 523 523Gd^(T) G Q W T C S G D  840 524 524 Gd^(T) G Q W A C S G D  841 525 525Gd^(T) G Q W T C S G D  842 526 526 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  843 527 527Gd^(T) D W T C Y(3-NO2) G D  844 528 528 Gd^(T) D W T C Y G D  845 529529 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  846 530 530 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  847 531 531Gd^(T) D W T C S d-leu D  848 532 532 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  849 533 533Gd^(T) D W T C 4-Pal G D  850 534 534 Gd^(T) D W T C S G D  851 535 535Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  852 536 536 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T S  853 537 537Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T A  854 538 538 Gd^(T) PP Q W H C T T R  855 539 539Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  856 540 540 Gd^(T) PP Q W H C T T R  857 541 541Gd^(T) G A W H C T T R  858 542 542 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  859 543 543Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  860 544 544 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  861 545 545Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T Y  862 546 546 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  863 547 547Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  864 548 548 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  865 549 549Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  866 550 550 Gd^(T) G q W H C T T R  867 551 551Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  868 552 552 Gd^(T) G Q thien-W H C T T R  869553 553 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T S  870 554 554 Gd^(T) G Q W S C T T R  871555 555 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  872 556 556 Gd^(T) G Q 2-Nal H C T T R 873 557 557 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  874 558 558 G Q W H C T T Y  875559 559 Gd^(T) GK(G.GdT) Q W H C T T Y  876 560 560 Gd^(T) G Q W A C T TR  877 561 561 Gd^(T) G Q W H C A T R  878 562 562 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TR  879 563 563 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T t R  880 564 564 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TR  881 565 565 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  882 566 566 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  883 567 567 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  884 568 568 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  885 569 569 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  886 570 570 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  887 571 571 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  888 572 572 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  889 573 573 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  890 574 574 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  891 575 575 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  892 576 576 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  893 577 577 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  894 578 578 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TD  895 579 579 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T D  896 580 580 Gd^(T) G Q W H Pen TT R  897 581 581 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T n R  898 582 582 Gd^(T) G Q W H C Ts R  899 583 583 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T y R  900 584 584 Gd^(T) G Q W H C Tr R  901 585 585 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  902 586 586 Gd^(T) G Q W H C TT R  903 587 587 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  904 588 588 Gd^(T) G Q W H C TT R  905 589 589 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  906 590 590 Gd^(T) G Q W H C TT R  907 591 591 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  908 592 592 Gd^(T) G A W H C TT L  909 593 593 Gd^(T) A W H C T T L  910 594 594 Gd^(T) G D W H C T TL  911 595 595 Gd^(T) G S W H C T T L  912 596 596 Gd^(T) P P W H C T TL  913 597 597 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  914 598 598 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TY  915 599 599 Gd^(T) G A W H C T T Y  916 600 600 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T TY(3-Cl)  917 601 601 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T I  918 602 602 Gd^(T) G Q W HC T T Cha  919 603 603 Gd^(G) G Q W H C T T Y  920 604 604 Gd^(G) G Q WH C Y T L  921 605 605 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T Y L  922 606 606 Gd^(T) G Q WN C T T L  923 607 607 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  924 608 608 Gd^(T) G Q WH C T T L  925 609 609 cbz-G Q W H C T T R  926 610 610 cbz-G Q W H C TT K(Gd^(T))  927 611 611 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T L  928 612 612 Gd^(T) G QW H C T T L  929 613 613 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T F(4-F)  930 614 614 Gd^(T)G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T L  931 615 615 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  932 616616 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  933 617 617 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  934 618618 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  935 619 619 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  936 620620 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T D R  937 621 621 Gd^(T) A W H C T T R  938 622622 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  939 623 623 cbz-G Q W H C T Dpr(Gd^(T)) R 940 624 624 cbz-G Q W H C T K(GdT) R  941 625 625 cbz-G Q W H C TOrn(Gd^(T)) R  942 626 626 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  943 627 627Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  944 628 628 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H CY T Y  945 629 629 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  946 630 630 Gd^(T)G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  947 631 631 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y 948 632 632 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  949 633 633 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  950 634 634 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y 951 635 635 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  952 636 636 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  953 637 637 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y 954 638 638 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  955 639 639 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R 956 640 640 Gd^(T) G Q W K(Gd^(T)) C T T R  957 641 641 Gd^(T) G Q W HC K(Gd^(T)) T R  958 642 642 Gd^(T) G Q W H C T T R  959 643 643 Gd^(T)G Q W H C Y T L  960 644 644 Gd^(T) K(Gd^(T)) K(K(Gd^(T)) G.Q.W H C T TY Gd^(T))  961 645 645 Gd^(D) GK(G.Gd^(D)) Q W H C T T Y  962 646 646Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  963 647 647 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H CY T Y  964 648 648 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  965 649 649 Gd^(T)G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  966 650 650 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T L 967 651 651 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  968 652 652 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  969 653 653 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y 970 654 654 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  971 655 655 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  972 656 656 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y 973 657 657 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y(3-I) T Y  974 658 658 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  975 659 659 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y 976 660 660 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  977 661 661 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  978 662 662 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y TK(Gd^(T))  979 663 663 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T))  980 664664 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T K(Gd^(T))  981 665 665 Gd^(T) G.YK(Y.G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  982 666 666 Gd^(T) G.V K(V.G.Gd^(T)) W H C TT Y  983 667 667 Gd^(T) G.F K(F.G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  984 668 668Gd^(T) G.H K(H.G.Gd^(T)) W H C T T Y  985 669 669 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) WH C Y T Y  986 670 670 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  987 671 671Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  988 672 672 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H CY T Y  989 673 673 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  990 674 674 Gd^(T)G K(G.Gd^(T)) W Y C T T Y  991 675 675 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C YK(GdT) Y  992 676 676 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  993 677 677Gd^(T) G Q W H C Y T K(Gd^(T))  994 678 678 Gd^(T) G Q W H C Y T Y  995679 679 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T))  996 680 680 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  997 681 681 Gd^(T) K(Gd^(T)) K(Gd^(T)) W H C TT K(Gd^(T))  998 682 682 Gd^(T) G. K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y  999 683 683Gd^(T) G. K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y 1000 684 684 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W HC Y T Y 1001 685 685 Gd^(D) G K(G.Gd^(D)) W H C T T K(Gd^(D)) 1002 686686 Gd^(T) Dpr(Gd^(T)) Dpr(Dpr(Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y Gd^(T)) 1003 687 687Gd^(T) K(Gd^(T)) K(K(Gd^(T))Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Y 1004 688 688 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1005 689 689 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H CY T Dab(Gd^(T)) 1006 690 690 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T Dpr(Gd^(T))1007 691 691 Gd^(T) G Dab(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1008 692 692Gd^(T) K(Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) F 1009 693 693 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T))W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1010 694 694 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y TK(Gd^(T)) 1011 695 695 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1012 696696 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1013 697 697 Gd^(T) GK(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T K(Gd^(T)) 1014 698 698 Gd^(T) K(Gd^(D)) K(Gd^(D))W H C Y T Y 1015 699 699 Gd^(D) K(Gd^(D)) K(Gd^(D)) G.W H C Y T Y 1016700 700 Gd^(D) K(Gd^(D)) K(Gd^(D)) A.W H C Y T Y 1017 701 701 Gd^(D)K(Gd^(D)) K(Gd^(D)) L.W H C Y T Y 1018 702 702 Gd^(D) K(Gd^(D))K(Gd^(D)) Y.W H C Y T Y 1019 703 703 Gd^(T) G K(G.Gd^(T)) W H C Y T YSEQ SEQ Comp ID ID ID NO NO Sequence  800 496 496 F P H H Y C L Y Bip 801 497 497 F P H H Y C V Y G  802 498 498 F P H H Y C L Y G  807 499499 F P H H Y C L Y G  808 500 500 F P H H Y C L Y G  813 501 501 F P HH Y C L Y G  815 502 502 F P H H Y C K(Gd^(T)) Y G  816 503 503 F P H HY C L Y G  820 504 504 A Y T W H C A Y E  821 505 505 E Y T W H C N Y E 822 506 506 E Y T W H C N Y E  823 507 507 E Y T W H C N Y  824 508 508E Y A W H C N Y e  825 509 509 E Y T W H C N Y E  826 510 510 E Y T W YC N Y E  827 511 511 E Y T W H C N Y E  828 512 512 E Y T W H C N Y E 829 513 513 E Y T W H C N Y E  830 514 514 E Y T W H C N Y E  831 515515 E Y T W H C N Y(3-I) E  832 516 516 E Y A W H C N Y e  833 517 517 EY T W A C N Y E  834 518 518 E Y Y W H C N Y E  835 519 519 E Y T W H CN Y E  836 520 520 E Y T W H C N Y E  837 521 521 E Y T W H C N Y E  838522 522 A Y T W H C N Y E  839 523 523 E Y T W H C A Y E  840 524 524 EY T W H C N Y E  841 525 525 E Y T W H C N Y A  842 526 526 E Y T W Y CN Y E  843 527 527 E Y T W H C N Y E  844 528 528 E Y T W H C N Y E  845529 529 E Y R W H C N Y E  846 530 530 E Y(3-I) T W H C N Y E  847 531531 E Y T W H C N Y E  848 532 532 E Y T W H C N Y E  849 533 533 E Y TW H C N Y E  850 534 534 E Y T W H C N Y Aib  851 535 535 F P H H Y C LY G  852 536 536 F P H H Y C L Y G  853 537 537 F P H H Y C L Y G  854538 538 F P H H Y C L Y G  855 539 539 F P H H Y C A Y G  856 540 540 FHyP H H Y C L Y G  857 541 541 F P H H Y C L Y G  858 542 542 F P H H YC L Y G  859 543 543 Y P H H Y C L Y G  860 544 544 1-Nal P H H Y C L YG  861 545 545 F P H H Y C L Y G  862 546 546 F P H H Y C L Y G  863 547547 F P H H Y C L Y G  864 548 548 F P H H y C L Y G  865 549 549 F P AH Y C L Y G  866 550 550 F P H H Y C L Y G  867 551 551 F P H H 1-Nal CL Y G  868 552 552 F P H H Y C L Y G  869 553 553 F P H H Y C L Y G  870554 554 F P H H Y C L Y G  871 555 555 F P H H Y C L Y G  872 556 556 FP H H Y C L Y G  873 557 557 F P H H Bip C L Y G  874 558 558 F P H H YC L Y G  875 559 559 F P H H Y C L Y G  876 560 560 F P H H Y C L Y G 877 561 561 F P H H Y C L Y G  878 562 562 F P H A Y C L Y G  879 563563 F P H H Y C L Y G  880 564 564 F P S H Y C L Y G  881 565 565 Bip PH H Y C L Y G  882 566 566 Bpa P H H Y C L Y G  883 567 567 F(4-CN) P HH Y C L Y G  884 568 568 F(4-NH2) P H H Y C L Y G  885 569 569 F(4-NH2)P H H Y C L Y G (Gd^(T))  886 570 570 F P H Dpr Y C L Y G  887 571 571 FP H Dpr(Gd^(T)) Y C L Y G  888 572 572 F P H 2-Pal Y C L Y G  889 573573 F P H H Y C L Bpa G  890 574 574 F P H H Y C L F G  891 575 575 F PH H Y C L 2-Nal G  892 576 576 F P H H Y C L Y(3-Cl) G  893 577 577F(3,4-OMe) P H H Y C L Y G  894 578 578 2-Nal P H H Y C L Y G  895 579579 Y(3-Cl) P H H Y C L Y G  896 580 580 F P H H Y C L Y G  897 581 581F P H H Y C L Y G  898 582 582 F P H H Y C L Y G  899 583 583 F P H H YC L Y G  900 584 584 F P H H Y C L Y G  901 585 585 F P H H if C L Y G 902 586 586 F P H H r C L Y G  903 587 587 F P H H bip C L Y G  904 588588 F P H H 1-nal C L Y G  905 589 589 F P H H t C L Y G  906 590 590 FP H H Y Pen L Y G  907 591 591 F P H H y C L Y G  908 592 592 F P H H yC L Y G  909 593 593 F P H H y C L Y G  910 594 594 F P H H y C L Y G 911 595 595 F P H H y C L Y G  912 596 596 F P H H y C L Y G  913 597597 F P H H 1-Nal C L Y G  914 598 598 F P H H y C L Y G  915 599 599 FP H H y C L Y G  916 600 600 F P H H y C L Y G  917 601 601 F P H H y CL Y G  918 602 602 F P H H y C L Y G  919 603 603 F P H H Y C L Y G  920604 604 F P H H Y C L Y G  921 605 605 F P H H Y C L Y G  922 606 606 FP H H Y C L Y G  923 607 607 F P N H Y C L Y G  924 608 608 F P H N Y CL Y G  925 609 609 F P H H Y C L Y G  926 610 610 F P H H Y C L Y G  927611 611 F P H H Y C I Y G  928 612 612 F P H H Y C V Y G  929 613 613 FP H H Y C L Y G  930 614 614 F P H H Y C L Y G  931 615 615 F P H H Y CF Y G  932 616 616 F P H H Y C Hfe Y G  933 617 617 F P H H h-Tyr C L YG  934 618 618 F P H H h-Tyr(Me) C L Y G  935 619 619 F P H H F(3-OMe) CL Y G  936 620 620 F P H H Y C L Y G  937 621 621 F P A H Y C L Y G  938622 622 F N-Me-A H H Y C L Y G  939 623 623 F P H H Y C L Y G  940 624624 F P H H Y C L Y G  941 625 625 F P H H Y C L Y G  942 626 626 F P HH Y C V Y G  943 627 627 F P H H Y C L Y G  944 628 628 F P H H Y C V YG  945 629 629 F P H H Y C V Y Y  946 630 630 F P Y H Y C L Y G  947 631631 F P H Y Y C L Y G  948 632 632 F P H W Y C L Y G  949 633 633 F P HH Y C L Y Y  950 634 634 F P H H Y C L Y Bip  951 635 635 F P H H Bip CL Y G  952 636 636 F P H H Y(3-CI) C L Y G  953 637 637 F P H HY(2,6-Me2) C L Y G  954 638 638 F P H H Y C L Y G  955 639 639 F P H H YC L Y G  956 640 640 F P H H Y C L Y G  957 641 641 F P H H Y C L Y G 958 642 642 F P K(Gd^(T)) H Y C L Y G  959 643 643 F P H H Y C L Y G 960 644 644 F P H H Y C L Y G  961 645 645 F P H H Y C L Y G  962 646646 F P T H Y C L Y G  963 647 647 F P Y H Y C V Y G  964 648 648 F P YH Y C L Y G  965 649 649 F P H H V C L Y G  966 650 650 F P H H V C L YG  967 651 651 F P H H Y C L Bip G  968 652 652 F P H H Bip C L Y G  969653 653 F P H H Y C L Y F(4-NH2)  970 654 654 F P H H Y C L F(4-NH2) G 971 655 655 F P H H Y C L F(4-NH2) G (Gd^(T))  972 656 656 F P H HF(4-NH2) C L Y G  973 657 657 F P H H Y C L Y G  974 658 658 F P H H Y CV Y G  975 659 659 F P H H Y C V Y Y  976 660 660 F P H H Y C L Y Y  977661 661 F P H H Y C L Y Bip  978 662 662 F P H H Y C V Y G  979 663 663F P H H Y C V Y Y  980 664 664 F P H H Y C L Y Y  981 665 665 F P H H YC L Y G  982 666 666 F P H H Y C L Y G  983 667 667 F P H H Y C L Y G 984 668 668 F P H H Y C L Y G  985 669 669 F P H H Y C L Y F  986 670670 F P H H Y C L Y Phg  987 671 671 F P H H Y C L Y Y  988 672 672 F PH H Y C L Y y  989 673 673 F P H H Y C L Y V  990 674 674 F P H H Y C LY G  991 675 675 F P H H Y C L Y G  992 676 676 F P H H 1-Nal C L Y G 993 677 677 F P H H Y C L Y G  994 678 678 F P H H Y C L Y G  995 679679 F P H H Y C L Y G  996 680 680 F P H H Y C L Y G  997 681 681 F P HH Y C L Y Bip  998 682 682 F P H H Y C V Y G  999 683 683 F P H H Y C VY G 1000 684 684 F P H H Y C V Y G 1001 685 685 F P H H Y C L Y Bip 1002686 686 F P H H Y C V Y G 1003 687 687 F P H H Y C V Y G 1004 688 688 FP H H Y C V Y Bip 1005 689 689 F P H H Y C V Y Bip 1006 690 690 F P H HY C V Y Bip 1007 691 691 F P H H Y C V Y Bip 1008 692 692 P H H Y C V YBip 1009 693 693 F P H H Y C V Y Bip 1010 694 694 F P H H Y C V Y Y 1011695 695 F P Y H Y C V Y Y 1012 696 696 F P H H Y C K(Gd^(T)) Y Bip 1013697 697 F P H H Y C K(Gd^(T)) Y Y 1014 698 698 F P H H Y C V Y G 1015699 699 F P H H Y C T Y G 1016 700 700 F P H H Y C V Y G 1017 701 701 FP H H Y C V Y G 1018 702 702 F P H H Y C V Y G 1019 703 703 F P H H Y CV Y Bip SEQ SEQ Comp ID ID ID NO NO Sequence  800 496 496  801 497 497 802 498 498  807 499 499 K(Gd^(T))  808 500 500 k(Gd^(T))  813 501 501 815 502 502  816 503 503 1,4 AMB (Gd^(T))  820 504 504  821 505 505 822 506 506  823 507 507  824 508 508  825 509 509  826 510 510  827511 511  828 512 512  829 513 513  830 514 514  831 515 515  832 516 516 833 517 517  834 518 518  835 519 519  836 520 520  837 521 521 GTE 838 522 522  839 523 523  840 524 524  841 525 525  842 526 526  843527 527  844 528 528  845 529 529  846 530 530  847 531 531  848 532 532 849 533 533  850 534 534  851 535 535  852 536 536  853 537 537  854538 538  855 539 539  856 540 540  857 541 541  858 542 542  859 543 543 860 544 544  861 545 545  862 546 546  863 547 547  864 548 548  865549 549  866 550 550  867 551 551  868 552 552  869 553 553  870 554 554 871 555 555  872 556 556  873 557 557  874 558 558 PEG(GdG)  875 559559  876 560 560  877 561 561  878 562 562  879 563 563  880 564 564 881 565 565  882 566 566  883 567 567  884 568 568  885 569 569  886570 570  887 571 571  888 572 572  889 573 573  890 574 574  891 575 575 892 576 576  893 577 577  894 578 578  895 579 579  896 580 580  897581 581  898 582 582  899 583 583  900 584 584  901 585 585  902 586 586 903 587 587  904 588 588  905 589 589  906 590 590  907 591 591  908592 592  909 593 593  910 594 594  911 595 595  912 596 596  913 597 597 914 598 598  915 599 599  916 600 600  917 601 601  918 602 602  919603 603  920 604 604  921 605 605  922 606 606  923 607 607  924 608 608 925 609 609 k(Gd^(T))  926 610 610  927 611 611  928 612 612  929 613613  930 614 614  931 615 615  932 616 616  933 617 617  934 618 618 935 619 619  936 620 620  937 621 621  938 622 622  939 623 623  940624 624  941 625 625  942 626 626  943 627 627  944 628 628  945 629 629 946 630 630  947 631 631  948 632 632  949 633 633  950 634 634  951635 635  952 636 636  953 637 637  954 638 638 PEG(Gd^(T))  955 639 639K(K(Gd^(T)) Gd^(T))  956 640 640  957 641 641  958 642 642  959 643 643 960 644 644  961 645 645  962 646 646  963 647 647  964 648 648  965649 649  966 650 650  967 651 651  968 652 652  969 653 653  970 654 654 971 655 655  972 656 656  973 657 657  974 658 658 K(GdT)  975 659 659K(GdT)  976 660 660 K(GdT)  977 661 661 K(GdT)  978 662 662  979 663 663 980 664 664  981 665 665  982 666 666  983 667 667  984 668 668  985669 669 K(GdT)  986 670 670 K(GdT)  987 671 671 K(GdT)  988 672 672K(GdT)  989 673 673 K(GdT)  990 674 674  991 675 675  992 676 676  993677 677 K(Gd^(T))  994 678 678 K(Gd^(T))  995 679 679 K(Gd^(T))  996 680680 K(Gd^(T))  997 681 681  998 682 682 PEG(Gd^(T))  999 683 683 1,6-Hex(Gd^(T)) 1000 684 684 1,4 AMB (Gd^(T)) 1001 685 685 1002 686 686 1003687 687 1004 688 688 1005 689 689 1006 690 690 1007 691 691 1008 692 6921009 693 693 R 1010 694 694 Y 1011 695 695 1012 696 696 1013 697 6971014 698 698 1015 699 699 1016 700 700 1017 701 701 1018 702 702 1019703 703

B. Examples of N- and C-Terminal GdDTPA Substituted Peptides Linked Viaa Thiourea Containing Linkage.

C. Examples of Agents Having Chelates Linked to a Peptide Side Chain

18. Collagen Binding of Peptides and Peptide-Chelate Conjugates

A. Preparation of Human Collagen:

Acid soluble human collagen extracted from placenta (Sigma, cat#C7774,lot#083K375) is dissolved in 15 mM HCl (3.5 mg/ml) by vortexing andgently shaking for 3-4 hours at 4° C. The acid soluble collagen isdissolved against PBS, pH 7.4 (three buffer exchanges are used). TheNaH₂PO₄ protein concentration is determined by the BCA method (Pierce,Cat #23225) using bovine collagen (Vitrogen, cat #FXP-019) as areference standard. Percent gelation (fibril formation) of the collagenis determined by incubating 10 μM collagen (3.3 mg/ml) at 37° C. for 6hours. A typical percent gelation is 60%.

B. Preparation of Rat Collagen:

Rat collagen (acid soluble, type I, rat tail, Upstate USA, Inc,cat#08-115) is dialyzed against 10 mM Phosphate (NaH₂PO₄), pH 4.2 withthree changes of the dialysis buffer. For the final assay, a 1:10 volumeof 10×PBS (100 mM NaH₂PO₄, 1.5 M NaCl pH 7.4) is added to the collagensolution (final 1×PBS) and incubated at 37° C. for 2 hours. The gelationis typically 90%.

C. Preparation of Microliter Plate:

Collagen solutions are gelled and dried down in the wells of a 96 wellmicrotiter plate (non-binding polystyrene, VWR, cat#29445-142) orpolypropylene plate (Coaster, cat #29444-100, code 3364). 75 μl of 10 μMhuman collagen is aliquoted into each well and the plate is incubated at37° C. for 6 hours to form a gel. The collagen gels are evaporatedovernight to dryness at 37° C. Ungelled collagen is removed by washingthe collagen films with 200 μl PBS (four times, 15 min per wash). Thethin collagen fibril film remains, coating the bottom of each well. Thefinal well content of gelled collagen is 150 μg. After washing by PBSthe plate is again dried at 37° C. for 2 hours and is stored at −20° C.

D. Binding Assay:

600 μl of 5 μM peptide solution is prepared in PBS, pH 7.4. 90 μl of the5 μM peptide solution is added to two collagen containing wells, and inaddition, an empty well to control for nonspecific plastic binding. 90μl is also reserved in a HPLC glass vial as a sample to measure thetotal concentration. The plate is then incubated on a shaker table (300rpm) for 2 hours at room temperature to allow the compound to bind.After 2 hours the supernatant from each well (with or without collagen)is transferred to an HPLC glass vial. The relative amount of free,unbound compound in the sample supernatants and the amount of compoundin the reserved (total) sample are determined either by HPLC (Agilent,1100 series) or for the metal containing compounds by ICP-MS (Agilent7500). For HPLC analysis, the compounds are chromatographed on aKromasil C-4 column (AKZONOBEL, cat #E 22840), and eluted use a twobuffer system (buffer A, 1% TFA in distilled water, buffer B 1% TFA inAcetonitrile). Each sample (30 μA) is injected onto the column and thecompound (peptide or other compound) is eluted by a 10-40% gradient ofbuffer B (3 min, 5 ml/min). The peak area of the compound in each sampleis determined by integration using the ChemStation software. For ICP-MSanalysis the gadolinium concentration is determined directly. Values forthe supernatant samples ([Free]) after incubation with collagen and thetotal sample are averaged. The percent bound, % B, is calculated fromthe formula: % B=([Total]−[Free])/[Total].

TABLE 43 Collagen binding of Gd-peptide conjugates to human and ratcollagen at 5 μM compound and 5 μM collagen, 37° C., pH 7.4 Comp HumanRat ID NO. binding binding 800 85% 88% 801 81% 77% 802 57% 45% 807 48%45% 808 25% 19% 813 65% 55% 815 66% 59% 816 48% 48% 820 60% 29% 821 56%29% 822 47% 20% 823 53% 28% 824 12%  0% 825 61% 63% 826 87% 71% 827 41%20% 828 52% 20% 829 20% 21% 830 26% 11% 831 50% 21% 832 12%  4% 833 13% 4% 834 22%  9% 835 17%  9% 836 13%  8% 837 22% 10% 838 70% 61% 839 30%11% 840 15%  3% 841 51% 28% 842 23%  9% 843 55% 36% 844 68% 48% 845 36%10% 846 31%  9% 847 16%  7% 848 35%  9% 849 64% 42% 850 75% 67% 851 50%41% 852 65% 57% 853 66% 57% 854 64% 56% 855 27% 15% 856 52% 42% 857 67%69% 858 64% 46% 859 47% 38% 860 60% 45% 861 73% 79% 862 77% 76% 863 67%57% 864 64% 50% 865 30% 17% 866 60% 38% 867 55% 48% 868 36% 40% 869 46%37% 870 30% 28% 871 68% 54% 872 41% 35% 873 38% 33% 874 45% 28% 875 64%60% 876 48% 26% 877 58% 41% 878  8%  9% 879 33%  0% 880 30%  0% 881 19%28% 882  0% 13% 883  8%  2% 884 24% 15% 885 16%  9% 886  8% 13% 887  0%16% 888 38% 30% 889 38% 19% 890 38% 15% 891 79% 70% 892 63% 56% 893  4% 2% 894 20% 15% 895  7%  0% 896 50% 41% 897  4%  1% 898  5%  3% 899 20%14% 900  4%  1% 901  2%  2% 902  7%  2% 903  3%  5% 904  0%  3% 905  6% 2% 906 13%  5% 907  6%  1% 908 20%  0% 909 14%  0% 910 13%  0% 911 15% 0% 912 20%  0% 913 78% 64% 914 19%  0% 915 15%  0% 916 23%  0% 917 12% 0% 918 19%  0% 919 93% 93% 920 67% 91% 921 68% 35% 922 68% 58% 923 28%10% 924 24%  1% 925 64% 62% 926 81% 87% 927 64% 63% 928 73% 80% 929 27%34% 930 31% 42% 931 70% 83% 932 59% 79% 933 36% 24% 934 21% 14% 935 59%39% 936  9%  5% 937 11% 14% 938 16% 13% 939  4%  5% 940  9%  8% 941  8% 5% 942 78% 67% 943 55% 72% 944 91% 84% 945 83% 82% 946 71% 68% 947 64%57% 948 25% 17% 949 72% 79% 950 78% 79% 951 45% 32% 952 52% 72% 953 50%50% 954 31% 22% 955 51% 36% 956 39% 15% 957 42% 39% 958 45% 33% 959 58%68% 960 30% 34% 961 54% 55% 962 20% 10% 963 82% 91% 964 88% 86% 965 26%11% 966 14%  8% 967 11%  4% 968 77% 64% 970 53% 54% 971 21% 25% 972  3% 0% 973 85% 92% 974 71% 69% 975 70% 64% 976 62% 57% 977 40% 43% 978 64%66% 979 87% 86% 980 85% 80% 981 73% 81% 982 40% 47% 983 58% 59% 984 67%69% 985 56% 68% 986 60% 67% 987 62% 68% 988 69% 71% 989 67% 74% 990 59%62% 991 23% 11% 992 75% 64% 993 75% 70% 994 86% 84% 995 51% 42% 996 76%67% 997 53% 55% 998 71% 75% 999 65% 66% 1000 75% 68% 1001 83% 81% 100244% 45% 1003 48% 47% 1004 91% 90% 1005 90% 95% 1006 89% 87% 1007 87% 92%1008 94% 93% 1009 93% 96% 1010 92% 89% 1011 94% 93% 1012 91% 92% 101381% 88% 1014 72% 61% 1015 29% 30% 1016 48% 50% 1017 25% 18% 1018 53% 55%1019 14%  6%Binding constant. The binding of Compound ID No. 800 to mouse collagen(5 μM) was measured over the concentration range 1-300 μM of Comp IDNo:800. The binding data was fit to a model on N binding sites withequal affinity. This yielded a dissociation constant of 1.8 μM and 8equivalent binding sites.

19. Binding of Comp ID No 1014 to Other Collagens

Compound ID No 1014 was assayed for binding to type I collagen ofdifferent species using the dried collagen assay described above. Underthe conditions 6 μM Comp ID No 1014, 5 μM collagen, 37° C., pH 7.4, CompID No 1014 was 81.3% bound to human collagen, 73% bound to pig collagen,68.9% bound to rabbit collagen, 62.9% bound to rat collagen, 47.7% boundto mouse collagen.

This shows that Comp ID No 1014 has affinity for type I collagen from anumber of species.

Additional competition studies were carried out. The dried collagenassay was modified to include a soluble competitor protein. In thisexperiment there was 5 μM insoluble type I human or rat collagen, 5 μMComp ID No 1014, and 1.6 μM of a competitor protein.

% bound to % bound to insoluble insoluble Competitor protein humancollagen rat collagen None 70.1 58.6 Type I human collagen 60.5 21.0Type II human collagen 68.8 54.2 Type III human collagen 66.6 46.9 TypeIV human collagen 59.9 28.1

There was significant inhibition of binding from soluble type I humancollagen and soluble type IV human collagen indicating strong binding ofComp ID No 1014 to these collagens. There was weaker inhibition withsoluble type III human collagen and weaker still with type II humancollagen. However both of these collagens still inhibited binding andindicated that there is some affinity of Comp ID No 1014 for type IIIand type II human collagen.

20. ¹¹¹In Radiolabeling of Comp ID 726

Peptide-chelate conjugate Compound ID 726 (11.0 mg, 2.41 μmol) wasdissolved in 200 μL of nanopure water in a glass vial equipped with aTeflon-coated magnetic stir bar. A solution of ¹¹¹InCl₃ in 1M HCl(Perkin Elmer, 8.2 μL, 328 μCi) was then added followed by 100 μL ofwater. The pH of the resulting solution was checked with pH paper and 1MHCl was added to reach pH 4. The resulting solution was heated at 45° C.and stirred for 1 hour. The solution was removed from the hot plate andleft to cool to room temperature. A 2 μL aliquot was taken and added toabout 1004 of 50 mM HEPES buffer (pH≈7) for analysis by HPLC using a ydetector (C4 column; eluent A: 50 mM ammonium formate, 0.1 mM EDTA inwater; eluent B: acetonitrile; gradient of 2 to 45% B in 13 minutes; anyunreacted In-111 elutes in the void). Radiochemical purity was >99%.When the reaction was complete, the pH was readjusted to ˜7 by additionof a 1M solution of sodium hydroxide.

21. Additional Synthesized Peptides

Additional peptides were synthesized following the general protocoldescribed in Example 2. Peptide sequences are shown in Tables 44 and 45.Note that a lower-case letter indicates the D-form of the amino acid.

TABLE 44all peptides are cyclic and cyclized through a disulfide bond betweenthe two cysteines: SEQ ID NO. Sequence 704 K(H.G) W H C T T Y F P H H YC L Y G 705 GQ W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 706 Q W H C T T Y F P H H YC L Y G 707 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 1,4 AMB 708 K(G) W H C YT Y F P Y H Y C V Y G 709 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P Y H Y C V Y G 710 K(G) WH C T T Y F P H H V C L Y G 711 K(G) W H C T T L F P H H V C L Y G 712K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Dip G 713 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Dip CL Y G 714 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Dip C L Y G 715 K(G) W H C T T Y F PH H Y C L Y F(4-NH2) 716 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L F(4-NH2) G 717K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L F(4-NH2) G 718 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H HF(4-NH2) C L Y G 719 K(G) W H C Y(3-I) T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 720 K(G) WH C Y(3-I) T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 721 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y GK 722 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y Y K 723 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H HY C V Y Y K 724 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 725 K(G) W H C T TY F P H H Y C L Y Bip K 726 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y G 727 K(G)W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Y 728 K(G) W H C T T K F P H H Y C L Y Y 729K(G) W H C T T K F P H H Y C L Y Bip 730 K(Y.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y CL Y G 731 K(V.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 732 K(F.G) W H C T T Y FP H H Y C L Y G 733 K(H.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 734 K W H C Y TY F P H H Y C V Y G 735 K(F.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 736 K(V.G)W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 737 K(Y.G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G738 K(G) W H C T T K F P H H Y C L Y Bip 739 K(G) W H C T T K F P H H YC L Y Y 740 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Y 741 K(G) W H C Y T K F PH H Y C V Y G 742 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y Bip K 743 K(G) W H CT T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K

TABLE 45all peptides are cyclic and cyclized through a disulfide bond between thetwo cysteines: SEQ ID NO: Sequence 744 K(G) W H C T T K F P H H Y C L YBip 745 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y F K 746 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P HH Y C L Y F K 747 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 748 K(G) W H C YT Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 749 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y y K 750K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y V K 751 K(G) W Y C Y K Y F P H H Y C LY G 752 K(G) W H C Y K Y F P H H Y C L Y G 753 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H HY C L Y G 754 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H 1-Nal C L Y G 755 Q W H C Y T K FP H H Y C L Y G K 756 Q W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y G K 757 Q W H C Y TY F P H H Y C L Y G K 758 K(G) W H C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 759 K(G)W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y V K 760 KK(K) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G761 Dpr(Dpr) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 762 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H HY C L Y G K 763 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y F K 764 K(G) W H C Y TY F P H H Y C L Y Phg K 765 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y Y K 766K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y y K 767 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C LY V K 768 K(G) W Y C T T Y F P H H Y C L Y G 769 K(G) W Y C Y K Y F P HH Y C L Y G 770 K(G) W Y C Y T Y F P H H 1-Nal C L Y G 771 Q W K C Y T KF P H H Y C L Y G K 772 Q W Y C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y G K 773 K(G) W K CY T K F P H H Y C L Y G K 774 K(G) W Y C Y T Y F P H H Y C L Y G K 775K(G) W H C T T Y F P T H Y C L Y G 776 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P Y H Y C L YG 777 K W H C T T K F P H H Y C L Y Bip 778 K W H C T T K F P H H Y C LY Bip 779 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 1,6-Hex 780 K(G) W H C Y TY F P H H Y C V Y G PEG 781 K W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 782 K(G) W HC Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G PEG 783 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G1,6-Hex 784 K(G) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 1,4 AMB 785 K(G) W H C TT K F P H H Y C L Y Bip 786 Dpr(Dpr) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 787KK(K) W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 788 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V YBip 789 K(G) W H C Y T Dab F P H H Y C L Y Bip 790 K(G) W H C Y T Dpr FP H H Y C V Y Bip 791 Dab(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Bip 792 K W H CY T K F P H H Y C V Y Bip 793 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Bip R 794K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C V Y Y 795 K(G) W H C Y T K F P Y H Y C V YY 796 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H H Y C K Y Bip 797 K(G) W H C Y T K F P H HY C K Y Y 798 W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 799 K W H C Y T Y F P H H YC L Y G 800 G W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C T Y G 801 A W H C Y T Y F P H H YC V Y G 802 L W H C Y T Y F P H H Y C V Y G 803 Y W H C Y T Y F P H H YC V Y G 804 K(G) W H c T T K F P H H Y C L Y Bip 805 K(G) W H c T T K FP H H Y C L Y Bip

22. Synthesis of Compound ID No. 1014

Synthesis of peptide. The peptide (SEQ ID No. 408) was synthesized on anautomated peptide synthesizer “Symphony” (Rainin Inc.) using 1 to 12batch reactors loaded with 0.1 mmol of commercially available Rink amideresin (˜0.20 mmol/g). A double coupling cycle is used for each Fmocprotected amino acid and a 5-fold excess of each amino acid is used percoupling to synthesize the peptide on the resin. Standard Fmoc chemistryis used to elongate the peptide on the resin. The Fmoc is removed with asolution of 20% piperidine in dimethylformamide. Each amino aciddissolved in a 0.2 M solution of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole in NMP iscoupled to the peptide using a 0.2 M solution of diisopropylcarbodiimidein NMP. After each deprotection or coupling step the resin is washedalternatively three times with DMF and MeOH. The completed peptide/resinis washed with CH₂Cl₂ and dried under nitrogen.

After the synthesis of the peptide on the resin is complete, the peptideis cleaved from the resin using the following cleavage cocktail:TFA/Anisole/TIS/H₂O 88:4:4:4 (10 mL per 100 μmoles of peptide). Thesolution of fully deprotected peptide is then precipitated with coldether (40 mL). The peptide solid is isolated after centrifugation andthen re-dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of DMSO/40 mM pH 5 Acetate buffer (3mL per 25 mg of peptide). The cyclization is monitored by LC-MS (12 to48 h). The cyclic peptide is purified by reverse phase preparative HPLCwith UV (280 nm) detection using a mixture of 0.1% trifluoroacetic acid(TFA) and 10% (0.1% TFA in acetonitrile (ACN)) for 5 minutes and thenrising from 25 to 40% (0.1% TFA in ACN) over 14 min (20 mL/min, KromasilC18, 250×20 mm, 10 mm particle size, 100 Å pore size). The fractions ofpure peptide are pooled and lyophilized to give the final peptidemoiety.

Synthesis of ITC-Gd₃ Synthesis of(S)—N1-(2-aminoethyl)-3-(4-nitrophenyl)propane-1,2-diaminetri-hydrochloride salt

The (S)—N1-(2-aminoethyl)-3-(4-nitrophenyl)propane-1,2-diaminetri-hydrochloride salt was synthesized following the procedures ofBrechbiel and Meares (Brechbiel, M. W. et al. Inorg. Chem. 1986, 25,2772; Meares, C. F. Bioconjugate Chem. 2000, 11, 292.). The HCl salt ofthe methyl ester of para-nitrobenzylalanine (p-NO₂Bn-Ala-OMe, HCl salt,13.03 g, 50 mmoles, 1 eq.) was dissolved in methanol (30 mL) andtriethylamine (10.5 mL, 75 mmoles, 1.5 eq.) was added. The reactionmixture was stirred for 15 minutes at RT and ether (225 mL) was added.The reaction mixture was cooled to 0° C. with an ice-bath and theprecipitate was filtered off and rinsed with ether (20 mL). The filtratewas concentrated to an orange oil which was re-dissolved in methanol (10mL) and the solution of free amine was added at RT to ethylenediamine(100 mL, 1500 mmoles, 30 eq.) via a syringe pump over 4 h under argon.The mixture was stirred for 11 h and the ethylenediamine and themethanol were evaporated under high vacuum to give the desired crudeamide (13.16 g, 104%) as a brown oil which was used directly in the nextstep without any further purification.

The crude amide was dissolved in anhydrous THF (250 mL) and 1MBorane-THF complex (200 mL, 200 mmoles, 12 eq.) was added dropwise in 3portions (100 mL, 50 mL and 50 mL) at 0° C. over 4 days. The reactionwas stirred at RT between the additions. The reaction was refluxed at65° C. for 5 h and cooled to 10° C. with an ice-bath. The reaction wasquenched with a very slow addition of methanol (10 mL) at 10° C. Anotherportion of methanol (140 mL) was added more rapidly and the temperaturewas slowly raised to RT. The solvents were evaporated and the residuewas re-dissolved in methanol (50 mL) and the solvent was evaporated andthe last 2 operations repeated a second time. The last traces ofethylenediamine were removed under high vacuum overnight. The residuewas dissolved in absolute alcohol (200 mL) and 4M HCl in dioxane (50 mL)was added at 0° C. and a gum formed. The mixture was refluxed for 3.5 hand a fine powder formed over time. The reaction was stirred overnightat RT and then cooled at 5° C. in the refrigerator. The precipitate wasfiltered and rinsed with ether to give 8.53 g of the desired triaminetri-hydrochloride salt (49%) as a slightly yellow solid.

MS: 239 (M+1).

Coupling of DOTAGA to Triamine.

Triamine hydrochloride (n≦3) (2.07 g, ≦5.95 mmoles) purified byprep-HPLC was dissolved in DMF (60 mL) and CH₂Cl₂ (20 mL).DOTAGA(O-t-Bu)₄ (13.76 g, 19.6 mmoles, 3 eq.) and DIEA (62 mL, 35.7mmoles, 5.5 eq.) were added at once. HBTU (7.45 g, 19.6 mmoles, 3 eq.)was added portionwise at 0° C. under argon and the brown solution wasstirred for 24 h at RT. Excess DOTAGA was scavenged with a tris-amineresin (10.0 mmoles). HBTU (1.90 g, 5 mmoles) and DIEA (2 mL, 11.5mmoles) were added and the mixture stirred for 8 h. The resin wasfiltered and the solvent was evaporated under high vacuum. The residuewas dissolved in EtOAc and washed successively with saturated NaHCO₃ andbrine. The organic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄ and the solvent wasevaporated. The residue was purified by flash chromatography on silicagel (CH₂Cl₂/MeOH: 99.5:0.5 to 98:2) to give a pure fraction (0.46 g,70%) and a lesser pure fraction (1.28 g, 8.5%). MS: (M+3/3) 763.3;(M+2/2) 1144.1.

Reduction of Nitro Group.

p-NO₂Bn tris-DOTAGA amide (16.52 g, 7.22 mmoles, 1 eq.) was dissolved inEtOAc (100 mL) and 10% Palladium on carbon (4.0 g) was added underargon. The mixture was shaken under 45 psi Hydrogen. Fresh catalyst wasadded (2 g after 16 h and 2 g after 23.5 h). The catalyst was filteredafter 40 h and the solvent was evaporated to give 16.61 g of crudeaniline derivative which was purified by flash chromatography on silicagel (CH₂Cl₂/MeOH: 99:1 to 98:2) to give 14.32 g (88%) of the desiredproduct. MS: (M+3/3) 753.1; (M+2/2) 1129.1.

Deprotection of Ligand.

Deprotection of Ligand.

A mixture of TFA (280 mL), TIS (16 mL) and H₂O (16 mL) was added at 10°C. to the p-NH₂Bn tris-DOTAGA amide (16.67 g, 7.4 mmoles, 1 eq.) and thesolution was stirred for 10 minutes at 10° C. Methanesulfonic acid (8mL) was added dropwise over 2 minutes and the solution was stirred at RTfor 2 h. The reaction mixture was poured into ether (1.5 L) cooled at10° C. and the mixture was kept overnight in the refrigerator. Theligand was filtered quickly under argon, rinsed with ether (4×100 mL).The hygroscopic solid was transferred to a round bottom flask and wasdried under high vacuum to give the desired ligand (17.26 g, 104% crudeyield) as an off-white solid as a methanesulfonate salt. MS: 528.3(M+3/3); 792.7 (M+2)/2; (M+1) 1584.9.

Chelation of Ligand

Ligand p-NH₂-Bn-tris-DOTAGA (17.21 g, max 7.4 mmoles) was dissolved in25 mL of nanopure water. The solution was stirred at room temperature.The pH was adjusted to 6.5 (pH-meter) by slow addition of first a 4Mthen a 1M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide.

The temperature was then increased to about 50° C. Solid gadoliniumchloride hexahydrate was added in portions (11.1 mmoles; 3.69 mmoles;3.69 mmoles then 1.845 mmoles). After each addition, as the soliddissolved over time, the pH decreased as a result of chelation. It wasadjusted back to 6.5 by addition of a 1M aqueous solution of sodiumhydroxide. The reaction was monitored by HPLC-MS and more GdCl₃ wasadded until only the tris-chelate could be detected. The total amount ofsalt added at that point was 20.325 mmoles, amounting to 6.775 mmolestris-chelate.

A 100 mM aqueous solution of EDTA (10 mL) was added and the pH wasadjusted back to 6.5. The solution was checked by HPLC-MS and used as isfor the next step.

MS: 1025.2 (M+2)/2; 683.5 (M+3)/3 (complex isotopic pattern due to Gdisotopes)

Conversion of Anilino Group to Isothiocyanto Group with Thiophosgene toGive ITC-Gd₃.

To an aqueous solution of p-NH₂Bn-tris-Gd-DOTAGA amide (6.77 mmoles byICP) was added CHCl₃ (50 mL) and thiophosgene (0.65 mL, 8.47 mmoles,1.25 eq.) and the heterogeneous mixture was stirred vigorously for 16 h.The reaction was monitored by HPLC. The organic layer was decanted andthe last traces of solvent and excess thiophosgen were evaporated(excess thiophosgen was quenched with ethylenediamine before disposal).The aqueous solution was decanted and the grey solid was filteredthrough a paper filter to give a 27.8 mM solution of desiredisothiocyanate chelate (196 ml, 5.45 mmoles, 74% 3 steps). Theconcentration was determined by ICP. MS: 697.0 (M+3/3); 1045.0 (M+2)/2.

Coupling of the Peptide to ITC-Gd₃

The pH of a 38.6 mM solution of ITC-Gd₃ (16.0 mL, 0.61 mmole, 1.2 eq.)was adjusted to 6 with 1N NaOH and the peptide (SEQ ID NO: 408) (1.014g, calculated as 100% purity and 100% potency) was added portionwise.The pH was progressively adjusted to pH=9 with 1N NaOH and the insolublepeptide was continuously re-dissolved with DMF (amine free, 20 mL). Thereaction was monitored by HPLC using a neutral pH method (Phosphate pH=7buffer/ACN) and a C-18 column. After 18 h excess ITC-Gd3 was added (2ml, 0.15 eq.) was added and the solution was stirred for 23 h. The crudepeptide conjugate of Compound ID NO. 1014 was purified by prep-HPLC on 2inch C-4 column using bufferless conditions (ACN/H₂O 2% for 5 min 2 to23 over 5 min and 23 to 30% over 15 min) to give the desired product(0.87 g calculated as 100% purity and 100% potency, 38% yield). MS1354.8 (M+3/3); 1016.2 (M+4)/4; 813.2 (M+5)/5.

23. Mouse Model of Chonic Infarction

Myocardial infarction was induced in C57BL/6 mice by occlusion of theleft anterior descending coronary artery followed by reperfusion. Themice were anesthetized with an intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection of 100μg pentobarbital sodium per gram body weight and a thorocotamy wasperformed. The pericardium was removed and the left anterior artery wassutured with a 7.0 silk suture for 60 minutes after which reperfusionwas established.

Imaging was performed on separate animals at 7 days, 40 days, or 210days following infarction. Imaging was performed using on a Varian 4.7 TMRI system Mice were anesthetized with isoflurane (1 vol. % in oxygen).Three pediatric electrocardiogram (ECG) leads were attached to shavedlimbs and a rectal temperature probe was placed. ECG and core bodytemperature were monitored with a SAII Model 1025 monitoring and gatingsystem (Small Animal Instruments, Inc., Stony Brook, N.Y., USA).Temperature was maintained at 37.0±0.5° C. using circulating hot water.Imaging was performed prior to, and serially (every 5 minutes) postintravenous (tail vein) injection of 25 μmol/kg Compound ID NO. 800. 6-8short-axis inversion-recovery slices covering the whole heart from baseto apex were acquired with TI=430 ms, TR=1000 ms, RE=4.3 ms and 2averages. All images had a slice thickness of 1 mm with an in-planeresolution of 100×100 μm after zero-filling.

FIG. 5 shows a panel of pre- and post Compound ID NO. 800 images formice with 7 day, 40 day, or 210 day infarcts. The images show thatCompound ID NO. 800 enhances the myocardium relative to the pre-contrastimage. The Compound ID NO. 800 enhanced images show the infarct zone ashyperintense relative to the normal, viable myocardium. These imagesdemonstrate that the collagen targeted contrast agent can be used todemonstrate viability in infarctions of different ages from relativelyacute to chronic.

A heart with a 40 day old infarct was explanted, thoroughly washed insaline solution and fixed in a 3% by volume isotonic solution offormaldehyde for 12 hrs at 3° C. They were washed in PBS and stored in70% ETOH before embedding in paraffin. The heart was sectioned at 10 μmthick intervals from base to apex and stained with picrosirius red whichstains positive for collagen. FIG. 6 shows that the picrosirius stainedmyocardium correlates very well with the MR image. The collagen richscar stained darkly by picrosirius red appears hyperenhanced (bright) onthe MR image.

For two mice that had 40 day old infarcts, the hearts were explanted 50min post-injection of Compound ID NO. 800, thoroughly washed in salinesolution and grossly divided in two sections, scar versus non-scar, byvisually detecting the white epicardium associated with scar. Eachsample was assessed for tissue gadolinium concentration by inductivelycoupled plasma mass spectrometry. Blood samples were also taken at 50min post-injection and analyzed for gadolinium. In the two animals,respectively, there was 137 and 122 nmol Gd/g scar; 56.6 and 40.4 nmolGd/g viable myocardium; and 27.8 and 14.6 nmol Gd/g blood. These resultsquantitatively confirm the imaging and histology data. These data showthat: 1) the collagen targeted agent localizes preferentially in thecollagen rich scar; and 2) binding to collagen in the both the viablemyocardium and in the infarct zone results in retention of the agent andhigher gadolinium levels than in the blood.

24. Pig Model of Perfusion Imaging

Domestic swine (50 kg) were premedicated with 0.5 ml intramuscularatropine, 0.2 ml intramuscular azaperone/kg bodyweight, and 0.1 mlketamine/kg bodyweight. An aqueous solution of pentobarbital (1:3) wasadministered intravenously via an ear vein as needed to maintainanesthesia. The animals were intubated, and mechanical ventilation wasmaintained throughout the entire study.

A critical coronary artery stenosis was created by advancing a 3 mmSmash balloon catheter into the proximal left anterior descending (LAD)artery. After baseline MRI scanning, the balloon was inflated underX-ray guidance. X-ray angiography indicated reduced flow distal to theballoon but the absence of a complete occlusion. Lanthanum labeledmicrospheres (BioPAL Inc.) were administered into the left ventricle asa marker of blood flow at this point. The pig was placed in the MRscanner and an adenosine infusion (0.25 mg/kg/min) was started. After 8minutes of adenosine, another microsphere injection was made withytterbium labeled microspheres (BioPAL Inc.). After 10 minutes ofadenosine infusion, a 25 mL bolus of Compound ID NO. 1014 (13 mmol/kg)in 80 mM sucrose solution was administered via an ear vein. Theadenosine infusion was maintained for an additional 5 minutes. Steadystate imaging was performed at 5, 20, 40, and 60 min post Compound IDNO. 1014. Additional X-ray angiography was performed at 30 minutes postCompound ID NO. 1014 injection to demonstrate that the LAD was stillpatent. The animal was sacrificed at ca. 70 minutes post Compound ID NO.1014 and the heart removed and sectioned according to American HeartAssociation guidelines (M D Cerqueira et al, Circulation, 2002,105:539-42) and assayed for Gd and microsphere content. TTC staining wasapplied to rule out infarction of the myocardium.

Imaging was performed on 1.5-T Gyroscan Intera whole body MR system. Aradiofrequency spoiled 3D gradient echo sequence was used for the steadystate imaging. Five 10 mm slices were acquired in short-axisorientation. Scan parameters were TR=5.0 ms; TE=1.5 ms; flip angle=30°;FOV=260×260 mm; 256×256 matrix.

Example short-axis images from the mid-cavity of the heart are shown inFIG. 7. Prior to Compound ID NO. 1014 injection, the myocardium andventricles are both dark. Five minutes after injection the ventriclesare hyperintense because of contrast agent in the blood and themyocardium shows a dark, ischemic zone in anterior and anteroseptalsegments 7 and 8 whereas the inferior and lateral wall is much moreenhanced. At 20 minutes, the signal in the blood has decreased but themyocardium remains dark in segments 7 and 8 and brighter in segments9-12. Microsphere data are expressed in two ways. First blood flowduring adenosine stress for the mid-cavity of the heart (segments 7-12)is compared to blood flow at rest, prior to adenosine. Note thatperfusion increases significantly by 4-5 fold in segments 9-12, butthere is little flow increase in segments 7 and 8. The relative flow inthe mid-cavity at stress was also compared to the mean flow in the basalsegments of the heart. The base of the heart is proximal to the LADocclusion and does not suffer from a perfusion deficit. The mean flow inthe base was taken as “normal” perfusion at stress. Again, segments 9-12show flow that is equivalent to flow in the basal segments, i.e. normal.However flow is significantly reduced in segments 7 and 8.

These data demonstrate that the MR images are reflective of perfusion inthe myocardium as measured by microspheres. The collagen targetedcontrast agent provides positive image contrast in the normally perfusedmyocardium, whereas the ischemic part of the myocardium is hypointense(dark).

25. Pig Model of Perfusion and Viability Imaging

A Domestic swine (50 kg) was premedicated with 0.5 ml intramuscularatropine, 0.2 ml intramuscular azaperone/kg bodyweight, and 0.1 mlketamine/kg bodyweight. An aqueous solution of pentobarbital (1:3) wasadministered intravenously via an ear vein as needed to maintainanesthesia. The animal was intubated, and mechanical ventilation wasmaintained throughout the entire study.

A critical coronary artery stenosis was created by advancing a 3 mmSmash balloon catheter into the proximal left anterior descending (LAD)artery. After baseline MRI scanning, the balloon was inflated underX-ray guidance. X-ray angiography indicated reduced flow distal to theballoon but the absence of a complete occlusion. Lanthanum labeledmicrospheres (BioPAL Inc.) were administered into the left ventricle asa marker of blood flow at this point. The pig was placed in the MRscanner and an adenosine infusion (0.25 mg/kg/min) was started. After 8minutes of adenosine, another microsphere injection was made with goldlabeled microspheres (BioPAL Inc.). After 10 minutes of adenosineinfusion, a 25 mL bolus of Compound ID NO. 1014 (13 μmol/kg) in 80 mMsucrose solution was administered via an ear vein. The adenosineinfusion was maintained for an additional 5 minutes. Steady stateimaging was performed at 5, 20, 40, and 60 min post Compound ID NO.1014. Additional X-ray angiography was performed at 30 minutes postCompound ID NO. 1014 injection to demonstrate that the LAD was stillpatent. The animal was sacrificed at ca. 70 minutes post Compound ID NO.1014 and the heart removed and sectioned according to American HeartAssociation guidelines (MD Cerqueira et al, Circulation, 2002,105:539-42) and assayed for Gd and microsphere content. TTC staining wasapplied to identify regions of infarction of the myocardium.

Imaging was performed on 1.5-T Gyroscan Intera whole body MR system. Aradiofrequency spoiled 3D gradient echo sequence was used for the steadystate imaging. Five 10 mm slices were acquired in short-axisorientation. Scan parameters were TR=5.0 ms; TE=1.5 ms; flip angle=30°;FOV=260×260 mm; 256×256 matrix.

Example short-axis images from the mid-cavity of the heart are shown inFIG. 8. Prior to Compound ID NO. 1014 injection, the myocardium andventricles are both dark. Five minutes after injection the ventriclesare hyperintense because of contrast agent in the blood and themyocardium shows a dark, ischemic zone in anterior and anteroseptalsegments whereas the inferior and lateral wall is much more enhanced. At20 minutes, the signal in the blood has decreased but the myocardiumremains dark in segments anteroseptal area and brighter in the inferiorand lateral wall. At 40 and 60 minutes, redistribution has occurred andthe whole myocardium is of near uniform intensity with a smallexception. In the septum, there is a region of hyperenhancement presentat 40 min and increasing in intensity at 60 min (arrow). An inversionrecovery image obtained at 60 minutes clearly highlights thishyperintense region. Upon autopsy and TTC staining, it was confirmedthat there is a small infarction (6×4 mm on TTC staining) in the septum.

These data demonstrate that the collagen targeted contrast agent canprovide MR images are reflective of perfusion in the myocardium. Thecollagen targeted contrast agent provides positive image contrast in thenormally perfused myocardium, whereas the ischemic part of themyocardium is hypointense (dark). The collagen targeted agent alsoprovides information on viability. Infarcted tissue appears hyperintenserelative to viable and ischemic myocardium on these delayed scans. Thisis apparent on gradient echo and inversion recovery T1-weighted images.

26. Comparison of Collagen Binding Constant and Heart Uptake withCollagen Binding Contrast Agent and Non-Binding Analog

The affinity to collagen of two similar compounds (Compound ID No. 800and Compound ID No. 1019) was assessed over the concentration range1-300 μM compound at a fixed collagen concentration of 5 μM using thedried collagen assay. Compound ID No. 800 and Compound ID No. 1019differ only in the chirality of one cysteine. Compound ID No. 1019 has aD-cysteine whereas Compound ID No. 800 has an L-Cys in this position.The binding data was fit to a model on N binding sites with equalaffinity. This yielded a dissociation constant, Kd, of 1.8 μM and 8equivalent binding sites for Compound ID No. 800, whereas the affinityof Compound ID No. 1019 for type I collagen was much lower (Kd=400 μM).This demonstrates the specificity of Compound ID No. 800 for binding tocollagen.

In vivo heart uptake of these two compounds were also compared. Compound(either Compound ID 800 or Compound ID No. 1019), at a dose of 10μmol/kg, was injected into the tail vein of conscious male BALB/c mice(N=4 per compound). The animals were sacrificed at 15 minutespost-injection. The organs were immediately removed and rinsed insaline, and then blotted dry. Organs were digested with nitric acid andgadolinium content determined by ICP-MS. Gadolinium concentrations inthe heart were 25.5±2.0, 14.7±1.0, and in the blood 14.3±2.3, 13.3±0.3nmol Gd/g tissue for Compound ID 800 and Compound ID No. 1019,respectively. These data show that the collagen binder Compound ID 800is preferentially taken up in a collagen rich organ like the heart,whereas Compound ID No. 1019 is poorly taken up by the heart. Bothcompounds have similar concentrations in the blood.

27. Relaxivity of Compound ID NO. 1014

The relaxivity of Compound ID NO. 1014 was determined in pig plasma at37° C. using a Bruker mq60 spectrometer operating at 60 MHz (1.4 tesla).Compound ID NO. 1014 in pig plasma ranged from 0-200 μM. Samples wereequilibrated for at least 30 minutes at 37° C. T₁ was measured using aninversion recovery sequence. 10 delay times were used and T₁ wasestimated from the monoexponential change in signal intensity with delaytime. Recycle delays were set to at least 5T₁. T₂ was determined using aCPMG sequence with phase cycling. Typically 400 echoes were collectedand T₂ estimated from the monoexponential decay in signal. Relaxivitieswere calculated by subtracting the relaxation rate of the plasma with Gdfrom the relaxation rate of the plasma sample with Gd and then dividingthe result by the concentration of Compound ID NO. 1014. Therelaxivities determined this way were r₁=63.8±5.6 mM⁻¹s⁻; r₂=115.6±10.7mM⁻¹s⁻¹.

A number of embodiments have been described. Nevertheless, it will beunderstood that various modifications may be made without departing fromthe spirit and scope of the invention. Accordingly, other embodimentsare within the scope of the following claims.

1-74. (canceled)
 75. A collagen binding peptide, wherein the collagenbinding peptide is cyclic, has a length of 11 to 30 amino acids, andwherein one or more of the amino acids in the peptide is derivatizedwith a non-metallic radionuclide.
 76. A collagen binding peptide,wherein the collagen binding peptide comprises a cyclic peptidecomprising the amino acid sequence: W-X1-C-(X2)_(n)-W-X3-C,(SEQ ID NO: 806)

wherein: n=5-7; X1, X2, and X3 are any amino acid; wherein the peptidehas a length of 11 to 30 amino acids; and wherein one or more of theamino acids in the peptide is derivatized with a non-metallicradionuclide.
 77. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein thecollagen binding peptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the aminoacid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 807) W-X1-C-X2-G*-X3-X4-X5-X6-W-X7-C,

wherein: X1=any amino acid; X2=S, V, T, H, R, Y, or D; G*=G or any aminoacid in D form; X3=D or N, independently in D or L form; X4=any aminoacid in D or L form; X5=any amino acid in D or L form; X6=T, K, H, D, A,R, Y, or E; and X7=Y, K, H, V, S, M, or N; wherein the peptide has atotal length of 12 to 30 amino acids.
 78. The collagen binding peptideof claim 77, wherein the cyclic peptide comprises the amino acidsequence: W-T-C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C; (SEQ ID NO: 809)W-T-C-V-G-D-H-K-T-W-K-C; (SEQ ID NO: 810) W-Y-C-S-G-D-H-L-D-W-K-C;(SEQ ID NO: 811) or W-E-C-H-G-N-E-F-E-W-N-C. (SEQ ID NO: 812)


79. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein the collagenbinding peptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the amino acidsequence: (SEQ ID NO: 74) Q-W-H-C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G;

wherein the peptide has a total length of 16 to 30 amino acids.
 80. Thecollagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein the collagen bindingpeptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the amino acid sequence:C-Y-Q-X1-X2-C-W-X3-W, (SEQ ID NO: 813)

wherein: X1 is any amino acid; X2 is any amino acid; X3 is any aminoacid; wherein each C, Y, Q, W, X1, X2, or X3, independently, can be inthe D form; and wherein the peptide contains 9 to 30 amino acids. 81.The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein the collagen bindingpeptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the amino acid sequence:(SEQ ID NO: 814) Y-X1-X2-C-Y-Q-X3-X4-C-W-X5-W,

wherein: X1 is any amino acid; X2 is any amino acid; X3 is any aminoacid; X4 is any amino acid; X5 is I, G, L, V, F, or P; and wherein thepeptide contains 12 to 30 amino acids.
 82. The collagen binding peptideclaim 76, wherein the collagen binding peptide comprises a cyclicpeptide comprising the amino acid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 816)C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*,

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, and X8 are any amino acid; C* is Cor Pen in D or L form; and wherein the peptide has a length of 10 to 30amino acids.
 83. The collagen binding peptide of claim 82, wherein:X1=T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F,F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D or L form; X2=T, A,N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D or L form; X3=R, A,S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit,b-h-D, or K(Boc), in D or L form; X4=F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3),4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5=P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH),ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6=H,A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or L form; X7=H, A, S,N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or Lform; and X8=Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr,H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D orL form.
 84. The collagen binding peptide of claim 83, wherein the cyclicpeptide comprises the amino acid sequence: C-T-T-S-F-P-H-H-Y-C,(SEQ ID NO: 817) C-T-T-K-F-P-H-H-Y-C, (SEQ ID NO: 818)C-Y-T-Y-F-P-H-H-Y-C, (SEQ ID NO: 819) C-T-T-R-F-P-H-H-Y-C,(SEQ ID NO: 820) or C-S-G-D-E-Y-T-W-H-C. (SEQ ID NO: 821)


85. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76: (SEQ ID NO: 822)C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11,

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are any aminoacid; C* is C or Pen in D or L form; and wherein the peptide has alength of 13 to 30 amino acids.
 86. The collagen binding peptide ofclaim 85, wherein: X1=T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal,4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D orL form; X2=T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D orL form; X3=R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F),Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), in D or L form; X4=F, A, Y, E, R, L,Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2),F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5=P, A, Y,D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, inD or L form; X6=H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D orL form; 7=H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH),b-h-W, in D or L form; and X8=Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip,DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), orAib, in D or L form. X9=L, A, I, K, V, F, N, Y, P, Aib, Hse, Hfe, Bpa,2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, or F(4-NH2), in D or L form; X10=Y, A, F, E, Bpa,2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Y(3-I), in D or L form; and X11=G, E,Y, F, V, Bip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form.
 87. The collagen bindingpeptide of claim 76, wherein the collagen binding peptide comprises acyclic peptide comprising the amino acid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 823)C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*-X9-X10-X11-X12,

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are any aminoacids; X12 is any one or two amino acids; C* is C or Pen, in D or Lform; and wherein the peptide has a length of 14 to 30 amino acids. 88.The collagen binding peptide of claim 87, wherein: X1=T, A, K, V, I, S,Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl),b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D or L form; X2=T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D,G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D or L form; X3=R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P,Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), inD or L form; X4=F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2),Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E,in D or L form; X5=P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A,P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6=H, A, S, K, N, Y, T,D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or L form; X7=H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib,Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or L form; and X8=Y, A,R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe),Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form. X9=L, A, I,K, V, F, N, Y, P, Aib, Hse, Hfe, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, or F(4-NH2),in D or L form; X10=Y, A, F, E, Bpa, 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Dip, F(4-NH2), orY(3-I), in D or L form; X11=G, E, Y, F, V, Bip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in Dor L form; and X12=K, KK, Peg K, PEG(1×O), 1,4-AMB, 1,3-AMB, 1,6-Hex,PEG, or GTE, in D or L form.
 89. The collagen binding peptide of claim76, wherein the collagen binding peptide comprises a cyclic peptidecomprising the amino acid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 824)X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*,

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 are any aminoacid; C* is C or Pen, in D or L form; and wherein the peptide has alength of 12 to 30 amino acids.
 90. The collagen binding peptide ofclaim 89, wherein: X1=T, A, K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal,4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2), Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D orL form; X2=T, A, N, S, Y, R, V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D orL form; X3=R, A, S, L, Y, D, K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F),Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, or K(Boc), in D or L form; X4=F, A, Y, E, R, L,Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal, 1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2),F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal, Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5=P, A, Y,D, R, T, P(3-OH), ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, inD or L form; X6=H, A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D orL form; X7=H, A, S, N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W,W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or L form; X8=Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal,Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me), F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip,F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form; X13=H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, or Aib,in D or L form; and X14=W, A, Y, 1-Nal, 2-Nal, thien-W, Tic, or W(5-OH),in D or L form.
 91. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, whereinthe collagen binding peptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising theamino acid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 825)X16-X15-X14-X13-C*-X1-X2-X3-X4-X5-X6-X7-X8-C*,

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X13, and X14 are any aminoacid; X15 and X16 comprise one to three amino acids; C* is C or Pen, inD or L form; and wherein the peptide has a length of 14 to 30 aminoacids.
 92. The collagen binding peptide of claim 91, wherein: X1=T, A,K, V, I, S, Y, G, R, P, L, 3-NO2 Y, 4-Pal, 4-CO2H-F, 4-tBu-F, F(4-NH2),Y(Bn, 3-Cl), b-h-S, Y(3-I), or Aib, in D or L form; X2=T, A, N, S, Y, R,V, I, K, D, G, b-h-G, Orn, or Dpr, in D or L form; X3=R, A, S, L, Y, D,K, G, P, Aib, Y(3-Cl), I, Cha, Abu, F(4-F), Dopa, Tle, Cit, b-h-D, orK(Boc), in D or L form; X4=F, A, Y, E, R, L, Bip, F(4-CF3), 4-Pal,1-Nal, F(4-NO2), Hfe, Bpa, F(4-CN), F(4-NH2), F(3,4-OMe), 2-Nal,Y(3-Cl), Aib, or b-h-E, in D or L form; X5=P, A, Y, D, R, T, P(3-OH),ΔPro, Pip, N-Me-A, P(3-OH), Y(3-I), b-h-Y, or Aib, in D or L form; X6=H,A, S, K, N, Y, T, D, R, W, P, Aib, or b-h-T, in D or L form; X7=H, A, S,N, D, Y, W, Aib, Dpr, 2-Pal, 1-Nal, thien-W, W(5-OH), b-h-W, in D or Lform; X8=Y, A, R, T, V, H, D, S, P, 1-Nal, Bip, DOPA, H-Tyr, H-Tyr(Me),F(3-OMe), Y(3-Cl), Y(2,6-Me2), Dip, F(4-NH2), or Aib, in D or L form;X13=H, A, S, K, N, D, Y, T, P, or Aib, in D or L form; X14=W, A, Y,1-Nal, 2-Nal, thien-W, Tic, or W(5-OH), in D or L form; X15=Q, G, A, D,S, P, K, GQ, K(G), K(Y.G), K(V.G). K(F.G), K(H.H), KK(K), Dpr, or Aib,in D or L form; and X16=G, K, PP, GY, GV, GF, GH, GK(G), KK(K), Dpr,EAG, or PPG, in D or L form.
 93. The collagen binding peptide of claim92, wherein: X15=Q, D, or K(G); and X16=G.
 94. The collagen bindingpeptide of claim 76, wherein the collagen binding peptide comprises acyclic peptide comprising the amino acid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 264)G-Q-W-H-C-T-T-S-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-G; (SEQ ID NO: 400)G-K(G)-W-H-C-T-T-K-F-P-H-H-Y-C-L-Y-Bip; or (SEQ ID NO: 408)K-K-W-H-C-Y-T-Y-F-P-H-H-Y-C-V-Y-G.


95. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein the collagenbinding peptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the amino acidsequence: (SEQ ID NO: 826)X1-X2-X3-C*-X4-T-X5-X6-P*-X7-H-X8-C-X9-X10-X11

wherein: X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, and X11 are any aminoacid; C* is C or Pen; P* is P, L-hydroxyproline, piperidine-2-carboxylicacid, or 4-hydroxypiperidine-2-carboxylic acid; and; and wherein thepeptide has a length of 16 to 30 amino acids.
 96. The collagen bindingpeptide of claim 95, wherein: X1=any amino acid in L form; X2=W or W*;X3=H, A, K, or S; X4=T, Y, G, K, or Y*; X5=any amino acid in L form;X6=F, Y, Y*; X7=H, A, or Y; X8=Y or Y*; X9=L, V, L*, or Y*; X10=Y, F, orY*; and X11=G, Y, Bip, or Y*; wherein W* is; Y* is; and L* is.
 97. Thecollagen binding peptide of claim 95, wherein: X1=Q or K(G); and X5=R,Y, L, D, or K.
 98. The collagen binding peptide of claim 76, wherein thecollagen binding peptide comprises a cyclic peptide comprising the aminoacid sequence: (SEQ ID NO: 827)X1-X2-X3-C-X4-X5-D-X6-X7-X8-W-X9-C-X10-X11-X12

wherein: a) X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X7, X8, X9, X10, X11, and X12 areany amino acid; and wherein said peptide has a length of 16 to 30 aminoacids.
 99. The collagen binding peptide of claim 98, wherein: X1=anyamino acid in L form; X2=W or W*; X3=T, A, or W; X4=S, Y, A, V, or Y*;X5=G or D*; X6=E, A, or H; X7=Y, L, or Y*; X8=T, Y, A, or S; X9=H, S, orY; X10=N or A; X11=Y or Y*; X12=any amino acid in L form; wherein W* is;Y* is; and D* is.
 100. The collagen binding peptide of claim 98,wherein: X1=Q or D; and X12=E or G.
 101. The collagen binding peptide ofclaim 75 or 76, wherein the non-metallic radionuclide is selected fromthe group consisting of ¹⁸F, ¹²³I, ¹²⁵I and ¹³¹I.
 102. The collagenbinding peptide of claim 101, wherein the non-metallic radionuclide is¹⁸F.
 103. The collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76, wherein atleast one of the one or more derivatized amino acids is a derivatizedtyrosine.
 104. The collagen binding peptide of claim 103, wherein thederivatized tyrosine is iodinated with ¹²³I, ¹²⁵I, or ¹³¹I.
 105. Thecollagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76, wherein the one or moreamino acids are derivatized with a non-metallic radionuclide at theN-terminus, the C-terminus or at an amino acid side chain.
 106. A methodof PET imaging of a mammal, the method comprising administering to themammal an effective amount of a collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or76 and subjecting the mammal to PET imaging.
 107. A method of SPECTimaging, the method comprising administering to the mammal an effectiveamount of a collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76 and subjectingthe mammal to SPECT imaging.
 108. A method of imaging pulmonary fibrosisin a mammal, the method comprising administering to the mammal aneffective amount of a collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76 andimaging the mammal.
 109. A method of imaging cardiac fibrosis in amammal, the method comprising administering to the mammal an effectiveamount of a collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76 and imaging themammal.
 110. A method of imaging liver fibrosis in a mammal, the methodcomprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of a collagenbinding peptide of claim 75 or 76 and imaging the mammal.
 111. A methodof imaging renal fibrosis in a mammal, the method comprisingadministering to the mammal an effective amount of a collagen bindingpeptide of claim 75 or 76 and imaging the mammal.
 112. A method ofimaging atherosclerosis in a mammal, the method comprising administeringto the mammal an effective amount of a collagen binding peptide of claim75 or 76 and imaging the mammal.
 113. A method of imaging a tumor in amammal, the method comprising administering to the mammal an effectiveamount of a collagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76 and imaging themammal.
 114. A method of imaging a fibrotic disorder in a mammal, themethod comprising administering to the mammal an effective amount of acollagen binding peptide of claim 75 or 76 and imaging the mammal. 115.The method of claim 113, wherein the fibrotic disorder is scleroderma.